Huawei Technologies HW-TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint User Manual

Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd Videoconferencing Endpoint

User Manual

Download: Huawei Technologies HW-TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint User Manual
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Huawei Technologies HW-TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint User Manual
Document ID2518809
Application IDhn6WlKS+M5bshsUA8f86qQ==
Document DescriptionUser Manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize160.62kB (2007804 bits)
Date Submitted2015-01-30 00:00:00
Date Available2015-02-05 00:00:00
Creation Date2015-01-28 17:12:19
Producing SoftwareAFPL Ghostscript 8.53
Document Lastmod2015-01-28 17:12:19
Document TitleHUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C10 Administrator Guide 01
Document CreatorFreePDF 4.02 - http://shbox.de
Document Author: linsa

HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
V100R001C10
Administrator Guide
Issue
01
Date
2014-12-23
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address:
Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://enterprise.huawei.com
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
About This Document
About This Document
Before you use the product, refer to the product vendor for version mapping information and
to confirm compatibility with other videoconferencing equipment.
This document describes how to use the HUAWEI TE40 Videoconferencing Endpoint (TE40
or endpoint for short), HUAWEI TE50 Videoconferencing Endpoint (TE50 or endpoint for
short), and HUAWEI TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint (TE60 or endpoint for short),
including conference experience, device control, address book management, system settings,
installation, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Intended Audience
This document is intended for but not limited to endpoint administrators.
An endpoint administrator has access to all functions on the endpoint web interface, touch
panel (optional), and remote controlled user interface (UI). It is recommended that endpoint
administrators set parameters and manage the address book on the endpoint web interface.
When using this document, note the following:
Unless otherwise specified, the descriptions in this document are applicable to the TE40,
TE50, and TE60.
Except chapters 7.7 Security and 9.4 Customizing the Remote Controlled UI which
apply to the endpoint user interface controlled by the remote control (remote controlled
UI for short), descriptions and configurations in this document apply to the endpoint web
interface.
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Symbol
About This Document
Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices and
tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
This issue is the first official release.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Contents
Contents
About This Document ............................................................................................................... ii
1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Definition of an Endpoint Administrator ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Requirements on an Administrator ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Related Documentation................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.4 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.5 How to Obtain Help .................................................................................................................................................... 10
2 Web-based Login.................................................................................................................... 11
3 Menu Structure of the Web Interface .................................................................................. 14
4 Conference Experience .......................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Initiating a Point-to-Point Conference ........................................................................................................................ 17
4.1.1 Initiating a Conference from the Call Page .............................................................................................................. 17
4.1.2 Initiating a Conference from the Address Book....................................................................................................... 18
4.1.3 Holding a Call .......................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.2 Initiating a Multipoint Conference.............................................................................................................................. 19
4.2.1 Understanding the MCU and Built-in MCU ............................................................................................................ 19
4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page ................................................................................ 22
4.2.3 Initiating a Conference from the Conference History Page ..................................................................................... 25
4.2.4 Initiating a Conference from the Address Book Page .............................................................................................. 25
4.3 Scheduling a Conference ............................................................................................................................................ 26
4.4 Joining a Conference Using the Conference Access Number ..................................................................................... 27
4.5 Joining an MSUC Convergent Conference ................................................................................................................. 28
4.6 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS Network ........................................................................................... 30
4.7 Sharing a Presentation ................................................................................................................................................ 33
4.8 Creating and Sending Captions ................................................................................................................................... 34
4.9 Using the Do-Not-Disturb Function ........................................................................................................................... 35
4.10 Controlling a Conference .......................................................................................................................................... 35
4.11 Recording a Conference ............................................................................................................................................ 43
4.12 Sending and Receiving Instant Messages ................................................................................................................. 44
5 Device Control ........................................................................................................................ 46
5.1 Viewing the Video....................................................................................................................................................... 47
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Contents
5.2 Controlling a Camera .................................................................................................................................................. 48
5.3 Setting a Camera Preset .............................................................................................................................................. 49
5.4 Selecting Video Sources ............................................................................................................................................. 51
5.5 Controlling Audio ....................................................................................................................................................... 52
5.6 Setting the Combined Picture ..................................................................................................................................... 55
5.7 Setting Camera Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 55
5.8 Setting Preferred Video Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 57
5.9 Setting Up a PPPoE Dial-Up Connection ................................................................................................................... 58
5.10 Using the Remote Control ........................................................................................................................................ 59
6 Managing the Local Address Book ...................................................................................... 60
6.1 Editing the Local Address Book ................................................................................................................................. 60
6.2 Using Virtual Conference Rooms ............................................................................................................................... 63
6.3 Importing and Exporting
Address Book .................................................................................................................. 64
6.4 Customizing a Site Template ...................................................................................................................................... 64
7 System Settings ...................................................................................................................... 66
7.1 Setting Basic Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 67
7.1.1 Setting the System time ........................................................................................................................................... 67
7.1.2 Setting the Ringtone for Incoming Calls ................................................................................................................. 68
7.1.3 Managing Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 68
7.1.4 Setting Number Key Functions ................................................................................................................................ 70
7.2 Specifying Caption Settings........................................................................................................................................ 70
7.3 Setting Video Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 72
7.3.1 Understanding Video Input Capabilities .................................................................................................................. 72
7.3.2 Configuring Video Input .......................................................................................................................................... 75
7.3.3 Setting the Multi-View Mode .................................................................................................................................. 77
7.3.4 Understanding Video Output Capabilities ............................................................................................................... 78
7.3.5 Configuring Video Output ....................................................................................................................................... 81
7.4 Configuring Audio ...................................................................................................................................................... 88
7.5 Specifying Conference Settings .................................................................................................................................. 90
7.5.1 Setting Audio and Video Protocols .......................................................................................................................... 90
7.5.2 Setting General Conference Parameters .................................................................................................................. 90
7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters ............................................................................................................... 94
7.6 Specifying Network Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 98
7.6.1 Setting IP Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 98
7.6.2 Setting H.323 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 103
7.6.3 Setting SIP Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 105
7.6.4 Setting Wi-Fi Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 108
7.6.5 Setting SNMP Parameters...................................................................................................................................... 111
7.6.6 Setting Network Address Book Parameters ........................................................................................................... 114
7.6.7 Setting Firewall Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 117
7.6.8 Setting Network Diagnostics Parameters ............................................................................................................... 119
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Contents
7.6.9 Setting QoS Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 120
7.6.10 Connecting to a 4E1 Network .............................................................................................................................. 122
7.6.11 Connecting to a PSTN Network........................................................................................................................... 126
7.7 Security ..................................................................................................................................................................... 126
7.7.1 Enabling Encryption .............................................................................................................................................. 126
7.7.2 Supporting Remote Logins .................................................................................................................................... 127
7.7.3 Setting the Password of the Remote Control Administrator .................................................................................. 128
7.7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password ............................................................................................................................... 129
7.7.5 Setting the Air Content Sharing Password ............................................................................................................. 129
7.7.6 Setting Web Account Security ............................................................................................................................... 130
7.7.7 Setting Whitelist .................................................................................................................................................... 131
7.8 Importing Security Certificates ................................................................................................................................. 132
7.8.1 Importing a Certificate ........................................................................................................................................... 132
7.8.2 Importing Web Certificates .................................................................................................................................... 133
7.8.3 Updating Web Certificates ..................................................................................................................................... 134
7.9 Managing System Files ............................................................................................................................................. 134
7.9.1 Importing and Exporting Settings .......................................................................................................................... 134
7.9.2 Backing Up Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 135
7.9.3 Importing License Files ......................................................................................................................................... 135
7.9.4 Importing a Layout Policy File .............................................................................................................................. 136
7.9.5 Creating and Downloading a CSR File .................................................................................................................. 137
8 Upgrading ............................................................................................................................. 138
8.1 Automatic Upgrade ................................................................................................................................................... 139
8.2 Tool Upgrade ............................................................................................................................................................ 140
8.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Mini System ...................................................................................................... 143
8.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface ........................................................................................................... 144
9 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 145
9.1 Checking the Working Environment Periodically .................................................................................................... 146
9.2 Managing Common Users and Passwords ................................................................................................................ 146
9.3 Customizing the Web Interface ................................................................................................................................. 147
9.4 Customizing the Remote Controlled UI ................................................................................................................... 149
9.4.1 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons ....................................................................................................................... 149
9.4.2 Customizing the Home Screen............................................................................................................................... 149
9.4.3 Customizing Conference Control Functions to Be Displayed ............................................................................... 151
9.4.4 Customizing the Option Bar .................................................................................................................................. 151
9.5 Checking the Endpoint Periodically ......................................................................................................................... 152
9.6 Viewing System Status ............................................................................................................................................. 152
9.7 Querying System Information................................................................................................................................... 153
9.8 Querying Logs .......................................................................................................................................................... 153
9.9 Restoring Your Endpoint to Default Settings ............................................................................................................ 154
10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 155
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Contents
10.1 Understanding Diagnosis Methods ......................................................................................................................... 155
10.2 Common Faults....................................................................................................................................................... 159
11 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 171
11.1 Physical Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 171
11.2 Performance and Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... 172
11.3 Ports and Protocols ................................................................................................................................................. 173
11.4 Standards Compliance............................................................................................................................................. 176
A E1 and T1 Grounding Criteria ........................................................................................... 178
B Menu Structure of the Remote Controlled UI ................................................................. 179
C Requirements on Room Layout and Lighting ................................................................. 181
D Status Icons .......................................................................................................................... 182
E Default Settings ................................................................................................................... 185
F Glossary ................................................................................................................................. 187
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
1 Overview
Overview
About This Chapter
This document guides you through configuring, managing, maintaining, and troubleshooting
the endpoint.
1.1 Definition of an Endpoint Administrator
An endpoint administrator is an enterprise employee who is responsible for managing and
maintaining endpoint operations.
1.2 Requirements on an Administrator
As an administrator, you must meet the following basic endpoint administrator proficiencies
and be capable of collecting all information related to the endpoint and its working
environment.
1.3 Related Documentation
This section lists the documentation that you may refer to when you perform routine
operations and maintenance as well as answering questions from standard users.
1.4 Safety Precautions
For safety purposes, carefully read through these safety precautions and observe them during
operation.
1.5 How to Obtain Help
When you encounter an endpoint issue, use the help on the endpoint web interface or contact
technical support personnel.
1.1 Definition of an Endpoint Administrator
An endpoint administrator is an enterprise employee who is responsible for managing and
maintaining endpoint operations.
An endpoint administrator has the following job responsibilities:
Configures and manages the endpoint.
Routinely maintains the endpoint.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Troubleshoots the endpoint failures.
Answers standard users' questions about endpoint use.
1 Overview
1.2 Requirements on an Administrator
As an administrator, you must meet the following basic endpoint administrator proficiencies
and be capable of collecting all information related to the endpoint and its working
environment.
Basic Endpoint Administrator Proficiencies
Windows operating system
Gatekeeper (GK) and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) servers
Ethernet, TCP/IP, and Client/Server (C/S) model
H.323 and SIP protocols
Safe and effective use of electronic devices
Common maintenance tools
Videoconferencing endpoint functions and services
Information About the Endpoint and Its Working Environment
Table 1-1 lists the endpoint and working environment information that must be collected,
which helps you fulfill your job responsibilities and check the preparations for a recovery
from an emergency.
Table 1-1 Information to be collected
Category
No.
Item
Description
Device
information
Device location
Record the endpoint location in
as much detail as possible so
the endpoint can be quickly
located.
Networking condition
Record the network topology
and hardware connection
diagram that include every
device.
Endpoint information
List the IP address, user name,
and password for the endpoint
so you can quickly log in to the
endpoint in case of an
emergency. If you are not
permitted to record the
password for security reasons,
memorize it.
Software versions and tools
List the software versions
corresponding to the endpoint.
Software
and tools
Prepare troubleshooting tools.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
1 Overview
Category
No.
Item
Description
Contact
information
Purchased parts' service
information
Record the manufacturer
contact information, serial
numbers, and manufacturers'
warranty clauses for purchased
parts.
Technical support personnel's
contact information
Maintain a list of technical
support personnel with their
contact information and
responsibilities.
Spare parts
List all spare parts (including
the spare parts that Huawei can
provide) and corresponding
procurement methods.
Redundant or temporary devices
List all redundant or temporary
devices in the system, such as
standby file servers and
database servers.
Spare parts
1.3 Related Documentation
This section lists the documentation that you may refer to when you perform routine
operations and maintenance as well as answering questions from standard users.
You can refer to the documentation listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Reference documentation
Document
Description
When to Use
How to Obtain
HUAWEI
TE40&TE50&TE60
Videoconferencing
Endpoint
V100R001C10
Quick Installation
Guide
Describes the
packaged items and
provides guidance
for quick
installation, and
common
configuration.
When checking
whether the carton
contains all the
required items and
when installing the
endpoint
HUAWEI
TE40&TE50&TE60
Videoconferencing
Endpoint
V100R001C10
Quick Installation
Guide
Describes the
remote controlled UI
and provides quick
instructions in
commonly-used
endpoint functions.
When answering
questions from
standard users who
are using the
endpoint for the first
time or unfamiliar
with the endpoint
Hold Ctrl and click
the following
hyperlink: Product
Support > Unified
Communications
and
Collaboration >
Telepresence and
Videoconferencing
> Telepresence
Endpoints > Group
Endpoints.
HUAWEI
TE40&TE50&TE60
Videoconferencing
Describes how to
operate the endpoint.
When answering
standard users'
questions about
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Document
Description
Endpoint
V100R001C10 User
Guide
1 Overview
When to Use
How to Obtain
daily endpoint
operations
HUAWEI
TE40&TE50&TE60
Videoconferencing
Endpoint
V100R001C10
Administrator Guide
(this document)
Describes
conference
experience, device
control, address
book management,
system settings,
upgrade,
maintenance, and
troubleshooting
based on the
endpoint web
interface.
When setting
parameters,
managing the
address book,
controlling
conferences,
upgrading the
endpoint, and
performing daily
maintenance.
HUAWEI
TE40&TE50&TE60
Videoconferencing
Endpoint
V100R001C10 Help
Describes the
endpoint web
interface and
method for using
this interface.
When answering
questions that
standard users
encounter on the
endpoint web
interface or
explaining the
parameters on this
interface
Log in to the
endpoint web
interface and click
the Help tab.
1.4 Safety Precautions
For safety purposes, carefully read through these safety precautions and observe them during
operation.
Basic Precautions
Keep the device dry and secure from collision during storage, transportation, and
operation of the device.
Do not attempt to dismantle the device by yourself. In case of any fault, contact the
appointed maintenance center for assistance or repair.
Without prior written consent, no organization or individual is permitted to make any
change to the structure or safety and performance design of the device.
While using the device, observe all applicable laws, directives, and regulations, and
respect the legal rights of others.
Environmental Precautions
Place the device in a well-ventilated place. Do not expose the device to direct sunlight.
Install the device strictly according to the requirements of the manufacturer.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
1 Overview
Do not place any object on the top of the device. Reserve a minimum space of 10 cm at
the four sides of the device for heat dissipation.
Do not place the device on or near inflammable materials such as foam.
Keep the device away from heat source or fire, such as a radiator or a candle.
Keep the device away from any household appliances with strong electromagnetic fields,
such as a microwave oven, refrigerator, or mobile phone.
Operating Precautions
Do not allow children to play with the device or accessories. Swallowing the accessories
may be fatal.
Use the accessories such as the power adapter and battery provided or authorized only by
the manufacturer.
Ensure that the device does not get wet. If water gets into the device, disconnect the
power supply immediately and unplug all the cables connected to the device, including
the power cable, telephone cable, video cable, audio cable, network cable, and serial
cable, and then contact the appointed maintenance center.
Before plugging or unplugging any cable, shut down the device and disconnect the
power supply. While plugging or unplugging any cable, ensure that your hands are dry.
Do not step on, pull, or overbend any cable. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged,
leading to malfunction of the device.
Do not use old or damaged cables.
In lightning weather, disconnect the device from the power supply and unplug all the
cables connected to the device.
Keep the power plug clean and dry, to prevent electric shock or other dangers.
If the device is not used for a long time, disconnect the power supply and unplug the
power plug.
If smoke, sound, or smell is emitted from the device, stop using the device immediately,
disconnect the power supply, unplug the power plug and other cables, and remove the
batteries. Then, contact the appointed maintenance center for repair.
Ensure that no object (such as metal shavings) enters the device through the heat
dissipation vent.
Before connecting any other cable, connect the ground cable of the device. Do not
disconnect the ground cable until you have disconnected all the other cables.
Ensure that the three-phase power socket is grounded properly. The neutral line and the
live line cannot be connected inversely.
Do not scratch or abrade the shell of the device. The shed painting may lead to skin
allergy or malfunction of the device. If the shed painting material drops into the host, a
short circuit may occur.
Cleaning Precautions
Before cleaning the device, stop using it, disconnect the power supply, and unplug all the
cables connected to the device, including the power cable, telephone cable, video cable,
audio cable, network cable, and serial cable.
Do not clean the device shell with any cleaning solution or cleanser spray. Use a piece of
soft cloth to clean the device shell.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
1 Overview
Battery Usage Precautions of the Remote Control
Use only the recommended battery. Pay attention to the polarity of the batteries while
installing them.
If a battery does not fit in the device, do not apply force. Otherwise, the battery may leak
or explode.
To reduce the risk of explosion, do not use batteries of different types together. For
example, do not use an alkaline battery and a Mn-Zn battery together. It is recommended
that you use batteries provided or recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not use a new battery with an old battery. When you replace batteries, replace all of
them at the same time.
If you are not going to use the device for a long time, remove all the batteries.
If any battery leaks, emits smoke, or emits abnormal smell, stop using it immediately.
If the battery fluid comes in contact with your skin or clothes, rinse with water
immediately and seek medical assistance.
If the battery fluid goes into your eyes, do not rub your eyes. Rinse your eyes with water
immediately and seek medical assistance.
LCD Usage Precautions
Do not expose the LCD to direct sunlight.
Do not scratch or strike, apply force to, or place heavy objects on top of the LCD.
Do not watch the LCD screen for extended periods of time. This may harm your eyes or
blur your vision.
Touch Panel Usage Precautions
Do not tap the touch panel with excessive force.
Do not let the touch panel exposed to water or other liquids.
Place the touch panel on the desktop steadily to prevent it from falling.
LCD Cleaning Precautions
According to the instructions in the attached manual, use a piece of soft cloth to remove
dust from the surface of the LCD.
Do not clean the LCD with volatile solvents, such as alcohol, benzene, or a dilution
agent. Do not keep the LCD in contact with a rubber or plastic materials for long periods
of time. This will deteriorate the surface gloss of the LCD.
Wireless Product Usage Precautions
Keep the wireless device away from magnetic storage devices, such as a magnetic card
or a floppy disk to prevent loss of the stored information.
Stop using the wireless device and disconnect it from the power supply in places where
using of wireless devices is prohibited or using of a wireless device may lead to
interference or danger.
Unplug the wireless device from the endpoint and turn off the endpoint close to a
high-precision controlled electronic device, such as an audio phone, a pacemaker, fire
alarm, or an automatic gate. Otherwise, this will lead to malfunction of the electronic
device.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
1 Overview
The user who uses an electronic assistant medical-treatment device needs to confirm
with the service center regarding the effects of the radio wave on this device.
Do not take the wireless device to the operation theater, Intensive Care Unit (ICU), or the
Coronary Care Unit (CCU).
When using the device, ensure that the antenna of the device is at least 20 cm away from
all parts of your body.
In the area with inflammable or explosive materials, turn off your wireless device and
follow the relevant instructions given on the label to prevent an explosion or fire.
Use your wireless device and its accessories in a clean and dust-free environment.
Ensure that the wireless device does not come in contact with flame or a lit cigarette.
Ensure that the wireless device and its accessories are dry.
Do not drop, throw, or bend your wireless device.
Do not place the wireless device and its accessories in areas with extreme temperatures.
Reduction of Hazardous Substances
This device is compliant with the EU Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction
of Chemicals (REACH) Regulation (Regulation No 1907/2006/EC of the European
Parliament and of the Council) and the EU Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
Directive (Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council). For more
information about the REACH compliance of the device, visit the website
www.huaweidevice.com/certification. You are recommended to visit the website regularly for
up-to-date information.
Statement on a Class A Product
This is a class A product. In a national environment this product may cause radio interference
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
European Regulatory Compliance
The endpoint complies with the following European directives and regulations.
1999/5/EC (R&TTE)
2002/95/EC & 2011/65/EU (RoHS)
EC NO. 1907/2006 (REACH)
2002/96/EC (WEEE)
The endpoint complies with Directive 2002/95/EC, 2011/65/EU and other similar regulations
from the countries outside the European Union, on the RoHS in electrical and electronic
equipment. The endpoint does not contain lead, mercury, cadmium, and hexavalent chromium
and brominated flame retardants (Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB) or Polybrominated
Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)) except for those exempted applications allowed by RoHS directive
for technical reasons.
The endpoint complies with Regulation EC NO. 1907/2006 (REACH) and other similar
regulations from the countries outside the European Union. Huawei will notify to the
European Chemical Agency (ECHA) or the customer when necessary and regulation requires.
The endpoint complies with Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic
equipment (WEEE). Huawei is responsible for recycling its end-of-life devices, and please
contact Huawei local service center when recycling is required. Huawei strictly complies with
the EU Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE Directive) and electronic
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
1 Overview
waste management regulations enacted by different countries worldwide. In addition, Huawei
has established a system for recycling and reuse of electronic wastes, and it can provide
service of dismantling and recycling for WEEE. By Huawei recycling system, the waste can
be handled environmentally and the resource can be recycled and reused fully, which is also
Huawei WEEE stratagem in the word. Most of the materials in the endpoint are recyclable,
and our packaging is designed to be recycled and should be handled in accordance with your
local recycling policies.
In accordance with Article 11(2) in Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE), The endpoints were
marked with the following symbol: a cross-out wheeled waste bin with a bar beneath as
below:
North American Regulatory Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
This device does not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
If this device is modified without authorization from Huawei, the device may no longer
comply with FCC requirements for Class A digital devices. In that a case, your right to use the
device may be limited by FCC regulations. Moreover, you may be required to correct any
interference to radio or television communications at your own expense.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
1 Overview
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum
distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the user authority to operate
the equipment.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the device is operated in a commercial
environment.
This device generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy. If it is not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference. In this
case the user will be requested to correct the interference at his or her own expense.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm
between the radiator & your body.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme à la norme ICES-003 du Canada.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites IC d'exposition aux radiations définies pour un
environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé à distance minimum
de 20cm entre le radiateur et votre corps.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
1 Overview
1.5 How to Obtain Help
When you encounter an endpoint issue, use the help on the endpoint web interface or contact
technical support personnel.
Viewing the Help on the Endpoint Web Interface
The help on the endpoint web interface includes context-sensitive help and operation guide.
Context-sensitive help includes status icons and configuration verification messages. For
example, if certain settings on the system settings screen are incorrect, a message will be
displayed to indicate the error and how to rectify it.
The operation guide describes how to operate the endpoint web interface. When you are using
the endpoint and the documents delivered with the endpoint are unavailable, you can click
in the upper right corner to read the operation guide.
Obtaining Technical Support
The Huawei support website is an efficient and real-time communication platform where you
can obtain technical documents, submit technical questions, service requests, and
troubleshooting questions, and provide feedback on Huawei products. To seek technical help
over the Internet, please visit http://enterprise.huawei.com.
Provide the following information to help Huawei engineers answer your questions:
Endpoint serial number (web interface query path: Help > Version)
Software version (web interface query path: Help > Version)
Network information (web interface query path: Maintenance > System Status > Line
Status)
Diagnostic and troubleshooting measures you have taken
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
2 Web-based Login
Web-based Login
To remotely manage the endpoint in web mode, log in to its web interface.
Configuring the Browser
Before running the endpoint web interface on a web browser, configure the browser.
The web interface can run on Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla FireFox, and Google
Chrome. Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0 is recommended. If you use other browsers or
versions, the user interface (UI) display may appear slightly different. The web interface will
still work as expected.
Before you begin, ensure that the latest patches for the operating system and browser are installed.
If you want to use Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 to access the endpoint web interface in
HTTPS mode, enable HTTPS login mode for Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 as follows: Log
in to the endpoint in Telnet or SSH mode. (The default user name and password are debug
and Change_Me, respectively.) Run the web ie6httpsmode 1 command to enable the HTTPS
login mode.
The following description uses Window7 as an example to describe how to configure
Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0 and FireFox 3.6. The methods for configuring other browser
versions are similar.
Step 1 Start Internet Explorer.
Step 2 From the Internet Explorer menu bar, choose Tools > Internet Options. In the displayed
Internet Options dialog box, click the Security tab.
Step 3 In the bottom of the tab, click Custom level.
Step 4 In the Security Settings dialog box that is displayed, perform the operations as follows:
1.
Set all options under Downloads and Scripting to Enable.
2.
(Only Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0) Select Display mixed content under
Miscellaneous.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 (Optional) On the Security tab, click Trusted sites and then Sites.
The Trusted sites dialog box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
2 Web-based Login
Step 7 (Optional) In the Add this website to the zone text box, enter the IP address of your endpoint.
Then click Add.
Step 8 (Optional) Click OK.
Step 9 Click the Privacy tab. Move the slider to display the Medium level.
Step 10 Click the Advanced tab. Select Use TLS 1.0 under Security.
Step 11 Click OK.
The configuration is complete.
----End
To ensure that information can be properly displayed, if you choose to skip Step 6 through Step 8,
choose Tools > Pop-up Blocker > Turn Off Pop-up Blocker from the menu bar of Internet Explorer.
To set Firefox, do the following:
Start the Firefox. On the menu bar, choose Tools > Options. On the Main tab, select Show
the Downloads window when downloading a file. On the Privacy tab, select Accept
cookies from sites. Then select OK.
Logging In to the Web Interface
Step 1 Open Internet Explorer.
Step 2 In the address box, enter the endpoint IP address, such as 192.168.1.1.
Step 3 Press Enter.
The login page is displayed.
Step 4 Fill in User name and Password.
The default user name and password are admin and Change_Me respectively. You are advised to
change the default password the first time you log in to the web interface, and then change your
password regularly.
Step 5 From the Language drop-down list, select a language.
Step 6 Click Log In.
The home page is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
2 Web-based Login
Figure 2-1 Home page of the endpoint web interface
(1) Menu bar
(2) Expand/Collapse
button
(3) Area for displaying your
site name
(4) Shortcut
bar
(5) Desktop icons
(6) Area for
displaying logs
(7) Area for displaying
messages
(8) Status icons
----End
To ensure data security, after accessing the endpoint web interface, close the browser and delete browser
caches.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
3 Menu Structure of the Web Interface
Menu Structure of the Web Interface
Knowing the menu structure of the endpoint web interface helps you quickly find each
function item.
All function items on the web interface can be accessed from the menu bar on the home page.
Figure 3-1 shows the menu structure.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
3 Menu Structure of the Web Interface
Figure 3-1 Web interface menu structure
Only the TE60 supports 4E1 functions.
To quickly access a function item, you can also choose Help > Site Map and click the
hyperlink for the function item.
For details about the menu structure of the remote controlled UI, see B Menu Structure of the Remote
Controlled UI.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Conference Experience
About This Chapter
You can initiate or join conferences in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface. During a
conference, you can control the conference or share presentations.
4.1 Initiating a Point-to-Point Conference
You can initiate a point-to-point conference in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface.
4.2 Initiating a Multipoint Conference
You can initiate a multipoint conference in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface.
During a multipoint conference, all the sites can hear and view each other.
4.3 Scheduling a Conference
On your endpoint, you can schedule a conference to hold at specific time.
4.4 Joining a Conference Using the Conference Access Number
When initiating a conference for which the participant sites are uncertain, you can set only the
number of anonymous sites. With this setting, a site can join the conference by dialing the
conference access number and then following the interactive voice response (IVR)
instructions.
4.5 Joining an MSUC Convergent Conference
Huawei videoconferencing systems can be used in the Microsoft Unified Communications
(MSUC) environment. Register the endpoint (networked with MSUC) with a Lync Server
using SIP. After that, the endpoint can place calls to Lync clients, receive calls from Lync
clients, and view Lync clients' online status.
4.6 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS Network
The endpoint can join an HD video conference over an IMS network.
4.7 Sharing a Presentation
A computer can be connected to the endpoint to share files, and the remote sites can view both
your video and the desktop contents of the computer.
4.8 Creating and Sending Captions
You can create and preview a banner or caption on your endpoint.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
4.9 Using the Do-Not-Disturb Function
If you do not want to be disturbed by incoming calls, you can enable the Do-not-disturb
function.
4.10 Controlling a Conference
After initiating a multipoint conference, you can control the video and audio of sites using
conference control functions.
4.11 Recording a Conference
Your endpoint can record local and multipoint conferences.
4.12 Sending and Receiving Instant Messages
During a conference, you can send instant messages to remote sites and view or close the
instant messages sent from remote sites.
4.1 Initiating a Point-to-Point Conference
You can initiate a point-to-point conference in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface.
4.1.1 Initiating a Conference from the Call Page
On the call page, you can select a site, configure the line type and rate for the site, and place a
call to the site to start a conference.
Step 1 Choose Conference > Call.
Step 2 Select a remote site you want to call using either of the following methods:
Click Call History and select the remote site.
Enter the name, number, or IP address of the remote site.
Step 3 Set the site parameters, listed in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Site parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Site name/IP
address/Nu
mber
Specifies the name, number, or IP
address of the site you want to call.
To call a Cisco TelePresence
site, you must set this
parameter to the name of the
Cisco TelePresence site.
Line type
Specifies the type of the line used to
place the call.
By default, the last used line
type is displayed.
To call a Microsoft Lync site, set this
parameter to Auto or SIP.
Rate
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Specifies the data transmission rate
required.
Select the highest available data
transmission rate.
The data transmission rates supported by
your endpoint vary depending on the
type of site you want to call.
NOTE
If this parameter is set incorrectly,
the video quality will be affected
or the call might even fail to be set
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
4 Conference Experience
Setting
up.
Call mode
Specifies the call type.
Video: Place video calls
Voice: Place audio-only calls
The default value is Video.
This parameter is available only when
Line type is set to Auto or SIP.
The default settings of advanced conference parameters can meet the requirements of most simple
conferences. Alternatively, you can click Advanced Settings and set advanced conference parameters.
For the description of each advanced conference parameter, see 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference
Parameters.
Step 4 Click Call.
----End
4.1.2 Initiating a Conference from the Address Book
You can select a site from the address book and place a call to the site to initiate a conference.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book.
Step 2 Select one site you want to call from the local address book or the Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol (LDAP) address book.
Step 3 Click Call.
----End
To modify the settings of a site you want to call, click the site.
4.1.3 Holding a Call
If you receive a call or want to call another site in a point-to-point conference, you can
perform call hold operations.
Prerequisites
The Multipoint call mode parameter has been set to Multipoint converge on System
Settings > Conference > Normal on the endpoint web interface.
Procedure
Scenario 1: You are in a point-to-point conference with site B, and site C calls you. You can
perform any of the operations described in Table 4-2.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Table 4-2 Call hold operations
Click...
To...
Reject
Reject the incoming call and continue the current point-to-point
conference.
Accept & Hold
Active
Answer the incoming call and place the current point-to-point
conference on hold.
NOTE
After performing this operation, you can choose Conference > Hold Call
and click any of the following:
Resume: Resume the conference call placed on hold and place the
active call on hold.
On hold: Place the active call on hold.
Hang up: Disconnect a site.
Accept & End
Active
Answer the incoming call and end the current point-to-point
conference.
Ignore
Ignore the incoming call and close the call handling dialog box.
Scenario 2: You are in a point-to-point conference with site B and call site C. You can perform
any of the following operations described in Table 4-3 in the dialog box that is displayed.
Table 4-3 Call operations
Click...
To...
Hold Active & Call
Place the current point-to-point conference on hold and call site C.
NOTE
After performing this operation, you can choose Conference > Hold Call
and click any of the following:
Cancel
Resume: Resume the conference call placed on hold and place the
active call on hold.
On hold: Place the active call on hold.
Hang up: Disconnect a site.
Cancel calling site C.
4.2 Initiating a Multipoint Conference
You can initiate a multipoint conference in multiple ways on the endpoint web interface.
During a multipoint conference, all the sites can hear and view each other.
4.2.1 Understanding the MCU and Built-in MCU
The endpoint needs to use the MCU or built-in MCU to initiate a multipoint conference. If the
endpoint uses the built-in MCU to initiate a conference, no external MCU is required.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
MCU
As an indispensable component in a multipoint conference, the MCU is responsible for
multiple functions, such as site access, video exchange, audio mixing, data processing, and
signaling interaction.
Built-in MCU
An endpoint with the built-in MCU function can initiate a multipoint conference by
implementing functions such as site access, video exchange, audio mixing, data processing,
and signaling interaction. The endpoint can work independently, without involving the other
components on the videoconferencing network in conference scheduling. In this case, the
endpoint functions as a mini MCU.
On the endpoint web interface, choose Maintenance > System Information, and check whether the
endpoint has a built-in MCU.
To provide the built-in MCU function, the endpoint requires a specified license. Contact Huawei
post-sales engineers to purchase the license.
Conferences held with the built-in MCU function have the following features:
After a point-to-point call is set up, site-by-site calls can be made to hold a multipoint
conference.
BFCP or H.239 presentation dual-stream conferences are supported. A SIP site supports
BFCP dual-stream, an H.323 site supports H.239 dual-stream, and a hybrid conference
supports both BFCP and H.239 dual-stream.
Conferences can be locked from the built-in MCU. After a conference is locked, calls
from new sites are restricted.
Conferences can be attended by both H.323 and SIP sites and support H.323 site control.
If a conference is held with a built-in MCU, only Presentation is available.
Built-in MCU Capabilities of TE40/TE50
The built-in MCU supports the access from six HD video sites and three audio-only sites
simultaneously in a conference.
The six HD video sites include the local site that uses its built-in MCU, that is, the
built-in MCU site.
A maximum of six 720p30 full-adaptive sites are supported.
G.722 or G.711 full adaptation is supported.
Built-in MCU Capabilities of TE60
The built-in MCU supports the access from nine HD video sites and three audio-only sites
simultaneously in a conference.
The nine HD video sites include the local site that uses its built-in MCU, that is, the
built-in MCU site.
A maximum of nine 720p30 full-adaptive sites are supported.
G.722 or G.711 full adaptation is supported.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Initiating a Multipoint Conference on the endpoint with a Built-in MCU
Before initiating a multipoint conference, you must enable the built-in MCU function. To do
so, choose System Settings > Conference > Normal and set Multipoint call mode to AUTO
or Built-in MCU.
To initiate a multipoint conference using the built-in MCU, call the first site and then place
calls one at a time to several other sites. For details about other methods for initiating a
multipoint conference, see 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page,
4.2.3 Initiating a Conference from the Conference History Page, and 4.2.4 Initiating a
Conference from the Address Book Page.
For example, to use the built-in MCU of endpoint A to initiate a conference that includes
endpoints A, B, C, and D, perform the following steps:
From endpoint A, call endpoints B, C, and D until all the calls are set up.
If the built-in MCU of an endpoint is used during a conference, Lock conference can be selected from
the Conference control screen on the endpoint whose built-in MCU is being used to prevent unwanted
additional sites joining the conference.
Conference Control
Three types of roles exist in a multipoint conference initiated using the built-in MCU:
Endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs, chair site, and non-chair sites. A site can request
chair control rights only after chair control is enabled on the Endpoint to which the built-in
MCU belongs. The chair control is enabled by default.
Only H.323 sites support conference control functions.
Table 4-4 Conference control in a multipoint conference initiated using the built-in MCU
Role
Conference Control
Endpoint to which
the built-in MCU
belongs
Enable chair control, Disable chair control, Lock conference, Set
Continuous Presence, and Recording
Chair site
Release Chair, End conference, Delete Site, Add site, Set
Continuous Presence, and Recording
NOTE
Only H.323 sites where the endpoints in V100R001C10 are used support the
Conference Video Layout and Start functions.
Non-chair site
Request chair
The recording function is available only when the recording server address is configured on the
Endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs.
Continuous Presence on the Endpoint to Which the Built-in MCU Belongs
The Endpoint to which the built-in MCU belongs adjusts the continuous presence layout
based on the number of sites in the conference, and can add the local video and presentation
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
to continuous presence. A maximum of 7 sites are supported in continuous presence on the
TE40/TE50, and a maximum of 10 sites are supported in continuous presence on the TE60.
The maximum number of sites in continuous presence includes the local video and presentation.
For details about how to add the local video and presentation to continuous presence, see the
description of Add presentation to continuous presence and Add local video to continuous
presence in 7.5.2 Setting General Conference Parameters. The two parameters are invalid to H.323
sites where the endpoints in V100R001C10 are used. For these sites, you can press
remote control to add the local video or presentation to continuous presence.
on the
4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference
Page
On your endpoint, you can create a conference on the predefined conference page and initiate
it from this page.
Prerequisites
You can use SiteCall or the built-in MCU to initiate a multipoint conference.
SiteCall: Before initiating a conference, define the participant sites and register your
endpoint with the GK server. Then disable the built-in MCU as follows: Choose System
Settings > Conference > Normal and set Multipoint call mode to Multipoint
converge or OFF.
Built-in MCU: Before initiating a conference, enable the built-in MCU as follows:
Choose System Settings > Conference > Normal and set Multipoint call mode to
Built-in MCU or AUTO. If it is defined on the Service Management Center (SMC) as
a manageable participant, its built-in MCU capabilities will be restricted by the SMC. In
this case, consult the SMC administrator about the maximum number of calls supported
by the endpoint.
To provide the built-in MCU function, the endpoint requires a specific license. Contact Huawei
post-sales engineers to purchase the license.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Predefined Conferences tab.
Step 2 Click Create Conference and perform either of the following:
Click Address Book. On the displayed tab, select the desired sites.
Click LDAP Address Book. On the displayed tab, search for and select the desired sites.
Step 3 Click
The selected sites are added to the site list on the right.
Step 4 Set the conference parameters.
If you use the built-in MCU to initiate the conference, set Conference Name, Rate, and
Support recording only.
If you use SiteCall to initiate the conference, set all the parameters listed in the table.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Table 4-5 Conference parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Conference
Name
Specifies the name of the conference.
Rate
Specifies the data transmission rate for
the conference.
To help ensure conference
quality, set this parameter to
1920 kbps or a larger value.
Continuous
presence
Specifies the maximum number of site
videos that can be viewed
simultaneously during the conference.
When continuous presence is broadcast,
the sites in the conference can view the
videos of multiple sites simultaneously.
The default value is Disable.
If you select Disable, the conference
does not support continuous presence.
Other
parameters
Conference
control
password
Anonymous
H.323 sites
Anonymous
PSTN sites
Specifies the mode for setting conference
parameters.
Auto-sensing: Your endpoint sets
conference parameters to be the same
as the parameter settings described in
7.5 Specifying Conference Settings.
User defined: You must manually set
Conference control password,
Anonymous H.323 sites,
Anonymous PSTN sites, H.235
conference, and Paying site.
Specifies the password to the conference.
This password is required for:
The site that wants to chair the
conference to obtain the chair control
rights.
Anonymous sites to join the
conference for authentication. For
details about how to use the password
to join an authentication conference,
see 4.4 Joining a Conference Using
the Conference Access Number.
Specify the number of IP or public
switched telephone network (PSTN)
anonymous sites that are allowed to join
the conference.
The default value is
Auto-sensing.
Enter a value that contains 1 to
32 digits.
The default value is 0.
Anonymous sites are the sites whose
numbers are not defined. To allow five
IP or PSTN anonymous sites to join the
conference, set the Anonymous H.323
sites parameter to 5. To disallow any IP
or PSTN anonymous sites to join the
conference, set the Anonymous PSTN
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
4 Conference Experience
Setting
sites parameter to 0.
H.235
conference
Specifies the conference security type.
Insecure conference: No data
transmitted during the conference is
encrypted.
Secure media conference: Media
streams are encrypted.
The default value is Insecure
conference.
To enhance the communication
security on your endpoint,
select Secure media
conference.
NOTE
If you select Secure media
conference, confirm that
Encryption is set to Enable or
Maximum interconnectivity on
your endpoint and the endpoints to
call. Otherwise, the calls will fail.
Paying site
Specifies the party that will be charged
for the conference.
Local site: The local site pays for the
conference.
Another site: Another site pays for
the conference. If you select this
option, you must fill in Paying
account and Paying password.
The default value is Local site.
Support live
broadcast
Specifies whether your endpoint supports
live broadcasting for multipoint
conferences hosted by standalone MCUs.
By default, this parameter is
deselected, indicating that the
endpoint does not support live
broadcasting.
Support
recording
Specifies whether your endpoint supports
recording for multipoint conferences
hosted by standalone MCUs.
By default, this parameter is
deselected, indicating that the
endpoint does not support
recording.
Date
Specifies the conference start time.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
This parameter is mandatory only when
you schedule a conference.
Duration
Specifies the conference duration.
Unit: minute
This parameter is mandatory only when
you schedule a conference.
Do not leave this parameter
blank.
Step 5 Click Hold Conference.
The conference is initiated according to the parameters you set.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
4.2.3 Initiating a Conference from the Conference History Page
The conference history contains the records of conferences your endpoint initiated or attended
and sites your endpoint placed calls to or received calls from. You can select a record from the
conference history to initiate a new conference.
Prerequisites
You can use SiteCall or the built-in MCU to initiate a multipoint conference.
SiteCall: Your endpoint has registered with a GK server, and Multipoint call mode is set
to Multipoint converge or OFF under System Settings > Conference > Normal.
Built-in MCU: Multipoint call mode is set to Built-in MCU or AUTO under System
Settings > Conference > Normal.
To provide the built-in MCU function, the endpoint requires a specific license. Contact Huawei
post-sales engineers to purchase the license.
Background
The conference history stores a maximum of 50 records.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Conference History tab.
Step 2 Select a record and click
The conference starts.
----End
4.2.4 Initiating a Conference from the Address Book Page
From the address book on your endpoint, you can select sites to initiate a conference.
Prerequisites
You can use SiteCall or the built-in MCU to initiate a multipoint conference.
SiteCall: Your endpoint has registered with a GK server, and Multipoint call mode is set
to Multipoint converge or OFF under System Settings > Conference > Normal.
Built-in MCU: Multipoint call mode is set to Built-in MCU or AUTO under System
Settings > Conference > Normal.
To provide the built-in MCU function, the endpoint requires a specific license. Contact Huawei
post-sales engineers to purchase the license.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Step 2 Select sites from the local address book. Alternatively, search for sites from the LDAP
address book, save the found sites in the local address book, and select the sites from the local
address book. Then click Start Conference.
Step 3 Set the conference parameters. Refer to 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the Predefined
Conference Page.
Step 4 Click Hold Conference.
The conference starts.
----End
4.3 Scheduling a Conference
On your endpoint, you can schedule a conference to hold at specific time.
Prerequisites
You have set Conference line type in advanced conference settings to H.323 or Auto. For
details about the settings, see 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters.
Your endpoint has registered with a GK server, and Multipoint call mode is set to
Multipoint converge or OFF under System Settings > Conference > Normal.
Procedure
Method 1: Create and schedule a conference.
Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Schedule Conference tab.
Step 2 Click New Schedule. Select conference sites and set the conference parameters. Refer to 4.2.2
Initiating a Conference from the Predefined Conference Page.
Step 3 Click Schedule.
The conference is scheduled.
----End
Method 2: Create and schedule a predefined conference or schedule a predefined conference
that exists in the Predefined Conferences list.
Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Predefined Conferences tab.
Step 2 Click Create Conference or an entry in the Conference Name column.
The Hold Conference page is displayed.
Step 3 Select conference sites and set the conference parameters. Refer to 4.2.2 Initiating a
Conference from the Predefined Conference Page.
Step 4 Click Schedule.
The conference is scheduled.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Method 3: Schedule a conference in the Conference History list.
Step 1 Choose Conference > Start Conference and click the Conference History tab.
Step 2 Click an entry in the Conference Name column.
The Hold Conference page is displayed.
Step 3 Select conference sites and set the conference parameters. Refer to 4.2.2 Initiating a
Conference from the Predefined Conference Page.
Step 4 Click Schedule.
The conference is scheduled.
----End
Conferences scheduled using any of the preceding methods are displayed in the Schedule
Conference list.
4.4 Joining a Conference Using the Conference Access
Number
When initiating a conference for which the participant sites are uncertain, you can set only the
number of anonymous sites. With this setting, a site can join the conference by dialing the
conference access number and then following the interactive voice response (IVR)
instructions.
Background
A site dials a conference access number and follows the IVR instructions to enter the specified
password to join a conference. This process is called two-stage dialing.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the access number for the authentication conference.
When a conference starts, endpoints that have joined the conference can view the conference
access number by choosing Maintenance > System Status > Conference. Anonymous sites
can obtain the conference access number and authentication password from the SMC
administrator or chair site using other methods.
Step 2 Choose Conference > Call.
Step 3 In Site name/IP address/Number, enter the access number.
Step 4 Set the call parameters. Refer to 4.1.1 Initiating a Conference from the Call Page.
Select the highest data transmission rate supported by your endpoint to increase the call success rate.
Step 5 Click Call.
Step 6 Choose Conference > Second Dial. Follow the IVR instructions to select a language and
enter the password (if any) to join a conference.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
----End
4.5 Joining an MSUC Convergent Conference
Huawei videoconferencing systems can be used in the Microsoft Unified Communications
(MSUC) environment. Register the endpoint (networked with MSUC) with a Lync Server
using SIP. After that, the endpoint can place calls to Lync clients, receive calls from Lync
clients, and view Lync clients' online status.
Background
After the endpoint joins the MSUC network, the following can be implemented.
The endpoint and Lync clients can place calls to each other.
−
During a point-to-point call, switching between audio-only and video calls is
available on both the endpoint and Lync client.
−
The endpoint supports call forwarding on Lync clients. For example, if calls to Lync
A has been set to be forwarded to Lync B, then after a call between Lync A and
endpoint C is set up, endpoint C automatically disconnects from Lync A and calls
Lync B.
From Address Book you can view Lync clients' online status.
To view a Lync client's online status, you must save that Lync client to the local address
book.
The following describes how the endpoint places a call to the Lync client.
Procedure
Step 1 Register the endpoint with the MSUC network.
1.
On the endpoint web interface, choose System Settings > Network and click the
H.323/SIP Settings tab.
2.
Click the SIP tab and set the parameters for interworking with the MSUC to register the
endpoint with a Lync server. Table 4-6 describes the related parameters.
Table 4-6 SIP parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Register
with server
Specifies whether your endpoint registers
with a Lync Server.
Set this parameter to Enable.
An endpoint that registers with a Lync
Server can place calls to remote sites
using their IP addresses or site numbers
if the remote sites also register with Lync
Servers.
NOTE
If you select this parameter, you must also set
Server address, Site number, User name,
and Password.
Server
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Specifies the IP address or domain name
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Example 1: 192.168.1.10
28
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Parameter
Description
Setting
address
of the Lync Server with which you want
the endpoint to register.
Example 2: lync.zdtest.com
If you set this parameter to the Lync
Server domain name, enable the domain
name server (DNS). If the DNS is not
enabled, enable Proxy server.
Conference
service
number
You do not need to set this
parameter.
Enable
proxy server
You do not need to set this
parameter.
Proxy server
address
You do not need to set this
parameter.
Site number
Specifies the site number for your
endpoint.
Example: 123@zdtest.com
If your endpoint registers with a Lync
Server, endpoints that also register with
the Lync Server can dial this site number
to call your endpoint.
Obtain this value from the Lync
Server administrator.
Example: lync_1@zdtest.com
Password
Specifies the user name for
authentication registration.
Server type
Specifies the SIP server type.
Set this parameter to OCS.
User name
Transmissio
n type
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
OCS: Select this option if your
endpoint registers with the Microsoft
Office Communications Server
(OCS) or Microsoft Lync Server.
CISCO VCS: Select this option if
your endpoint registers with the Cisco
TelePresence Video Communication
Server (VCS).
Standard: Select this option if your
endpoint registers with other SIP
servers.
Specifies the protocol used for SIP
signaling transmission.
TCP: Use the Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) to implement
transmission reliability.
UDP: Use the User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) to implement
transmission with reduced latency.
TLS: Use Transport Layer Security
(TLS) to implement transmission
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Obtain the value of this
parameter from the Lync Server
administrator.
Only TCP and TLS
transmission are supported.
29
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
4 Conference Experience
Setting
security. Note that selecting this
option may affect the call rate. If you
select this parameter, you can set SSL
version.
SSL version
Specifies the encryption protocol used
for SIP calls, including TLS 1.0 and SSL
3.0.
The default value is TLS 1.0.
Video
request
handling
Specifies how your endpoint handles
video requests from a remote endpoint
during a point-to-point SIP audio call or
multipoint conference.
The default value is Manual.
3.
Accept automatically: Your
endpoint automatically accepts video
requests from the remote endpoint.
Reject automatically: Your endpoint
automatically rejects video requests
from the remote endpoint.
Manual: Your endpoint prompts you
to accept video requests from the
remote endpoint.
Click Save.
Step 2 Place a call from the endpoint to the Lync client.
1.
Choose Conference > Call.
2.
In the text box, enter the Lync client number.
3.
Click Call.
----End
4.6 Joining an HD-Video Conference over an IMS
Network
The endpoint can join an HD video conference over an IMS network.
Background
Borne by the standard IP protocol, IMS uses VoIP applications based on the standard SIP
applications of the 3GPP to provide fixed and mobile multimedia services for operators.
Integrating MCUs can enhance the functionality of the Huawei IMS HD videoconferencing
solution.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Prerequisites
You have obtained the required authentication information from the IMS administrator:
unified access number, conference ID, and conference password.
Endpoint users can obtain the required authentication information allocated by the IMS through emails,
text messages, notices, or other methods.
Procedure
Step 1 Register the endpoint with the network where the IMS is located.
1.
On the endpoint web interface, choose System Settings > Network and click the
H.323/SIP Settings tab.
2.
Click the SIP tab and set the parameters for interworking with the IMS, as described in
Table 4-7.
Table 4-7 SIP parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Register
with server
Specifies whether your endpoint registers
with an IMS server.
Set this parameter to Enable.
Only endpoints that have registered with
IMS servers can join the IMS network.
An endpoint that registers with an IMS
server can place calls to remote sites
using their IP addresses or site numbers
if the remote sites also register with IMS
servers.
NOTE
If you select this parameter, you must also set
Server address, Conference service
number, Site number, User name, and
Password.
Server
address
Specifies the IP address or domain name
of the IMS server with which you want
the endpoint to register.
If you set this parameter to the IMS
server domain name, enable the domain
name server (DNS). If the DNS is not
enabled, enable Proxy server.
IP address example:
192.168.1.10
Domain name example:
huawei.com
It is recommended that you set
Server address to the domain
name of the IMS server with
which you want the endpoint to
register.
Conference
service
number
Specifies the conference service number
for your endpoint to initiate conferences
over an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS)
network.
Set this parameter to the
conference service number
obtained from the IMS network
administrator.
Proxy server
Specifies whether to enable the proxy
server.
Set this parameter to Enable.
You must enable the proxy server when
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
4 Conference Experience
Setting
using the IMS network.
Proxy server
address
Specifies the address of the proxy server.
If you set Server address to the IMS
server domain name, set this parameter
to the IP address bound to that domain
name.
Example: 192.168.1.10.
Site number
Specifies the site number for your
endpoint.
The parameter value must
contain only digits.
If your endpoint registers with an IMS
server, endpoints that also register with
the IMS server can dial this site number
to call your endpoint.
Example: 12345
Specifies the user name for
authentication registration.
The value can contain digits,
letters, and special characters,
such as @ # %.
User name
Password
Example:
+0867552842007@huawei.co
Obtain the value of this
parameter from the IMS server
administrator.
Server type
Transmissio
n type
Video
request
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Specifies the SIP server type.
OCS: Select this option if your
endpoint registers with the Microsoft
Office Communications Server
(OCS) or Microsoft Lync Server.
CISCO VCS: Select this option if
your endpoint registers with the Cisco
TelePresence Video Communication
Server (VCS).
Standard: Select this option if your
endpoint registers with other SIP
servers.
Specifies the protocol used for SIP
signaling transmission.
TCP: Use the Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) to implement
transmission reliability.
UDP: Use the User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) to implement
transmission with reduced latency.
TLS: Use Transport Layer Security
(TLS) to implement transmission
security.
Specifies how your endpoint handles
video requests from a remote endpoint
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Set this parameter to Standard.
Set this parameter to UDP.
The IMS network only supports
UDP transmission.
The default value is Manual.
32
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
handling
during a point-to-point SIP audio call or
multipoint conference.
3.
Accept automatically: Your
endpoint automatically accepts video
requests from the remote endpoint.
Reject automatically: Your endpoint
automatically rejects video requests
from the remote endpoint.
Manual: Your endpoint prompts you
to accept video requests from the
remote endpoint.
4 Conference Experience
Setting
Click Save.
Step 2 Choose Conference > Call.
Step 3 In the text box, enter the conference unified access number.
Step 4 Click Call.
Step 5 Choose Conference > Second Dial.
Enter the required authentication information, such as the conference ID and password, as
prompted.
----End
Result
After the IMS authenticates the password, the endpoint can join an HD video conference over
an IMS network.
4.7 Sharing a Presentation
A computer can be connected to the endpoint to share files, and the remote sites can view both
your video and the desktop contents of the computer.
Prerequisites
The presentation sharing function has been enabled, and the presentation parameters have
been set. By default, the endpoint has the presentation sharing function enabled, and the
default presentation parameter settings support presentation sharing. To modify these
parameters, see 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters.
The presentation video source has been connected.
Wired connection
Use a cable to connect the computer to a video input port on the endpoint.
Air content sharing client
1.
(Optional) In the address box, enter the endpoint IP address and press Enter.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
2.
4 Conference Experience
(Optional) In the upper left corner of the login page, click Download Air Content
Sharing Client and install the client as prompted.
The
icon of the air content sharing client is displayed on the desktop when the
installation is complete.
If this is the first time you are installing the air content sharing client, you must restart
your computer before you can use it.
3.
Double-click
4.
Double-click the endpoint to connect, or enter the endpoint IP address and click
Connect.
5.
In the displayed dialog box, enter the password and click Connect.
The default password is Change_Me. For details, see 7.7.5 Setting the Air Content
Sharing Password.
Alternatively, ignore the dialog box and watch for the message An air content sharing source device
requests to connect to your endpoint. Accept? that will be displayed on the endpoint web interface
and remote controlled UI. When the message is displayed, select Accept. The client then successfully
connects to the endpoint without any passwords.
Background
You can select either of the following modes for sharing a presentation:
Auto: The endpoint automatically sends the video along with the presentation. This
mode is available only when Presentation mode is set to Live.
Manual: You can use the remote control to share a presentation.
For details, see 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters.
However, in live mode, the endpoint does not support presentation sharing using SIP.
On a Microsoft unified communications (MSUC) network, the endpoint does not support
presentation sharing.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Conference > Presentation.
Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, click Share.
The presentation is shared with remote sites.
----End
To stop sharing the presentation, click Stop.
4.8 Creating and Sending Captions
You can create and preview a banner or caption on your endpoint.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Conference > Caption.
Step 2 Click Middle Caption, Bottom Caption, or Banner. Then you can:
Share a caption in the Caption List list or a banner in the Banner Title list.
Preview a caption or banner on the display at your site.
Edit a caption or banner.
Save a caption or banner.
You can save a maximum of 10 entries to the Caption List or Banner Title list.
Create or delete a caption or banner.
----End
4.9 Using the Do-Not-Disturb Function
If you do not want to be disturbed by incoming calls, you can enable the Do-not-disturb
function.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Conference > Do-not-disturb.
The Do-not-disturb dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select Enable for Do-not-disturb and click OK.
----End
4.10 Controlling a Conference
After initiating a multipoint conference, you can control the video and audio of sites using
conference control functions.
Icons on the Conference Control Page
Table 4-8 lists common icons displayed on the conference control page.
Table 4-8 Icons on the conference control page
Ico
Description
The site is not in the conference.
Ico
Description
Your site is chairing the conference.
The site is in the conference.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
The site is being broadcast.
The site is being viewed.
The speakers of the site have been
muted, and the site cannot hear the
The microphones of the site have
been muted, and the other sites in the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Ico
4 Conference Experience
Ico
Description
Description
current conference.
conference cannot hear the site.
The site is sharing a presentation.
The site is a PSTN, H.323 PHONE,
or SIP audio site.
Table 4-9 lists the icons used to adjust the site display mode on the conference control page.
Table 4-9 Icons used to adjust the site display mode
Icon
Description
Refreshes the conference control page.
Displays sites in a list.
Displays sites as icons.
Controlling a Multipoint Conference Hosted by the MCU
Note that not all the conference control functions listed in Table 4-10 are available on the
conference control page during a conference, depending on your role in the conference and
the settings of conference control page.
Table 4-10 lists the conference control functions available in a multipoint conference hosted
by the MCU.
Table 4-10 Conference control functions
Conferenc
e Control
Function
Applica
ble
Role
Description
Request
Chair
Non-cha
ir site
The conference chair site can use more conference control
functions than other sites.
Only non-chair sites can request chair control rights when no
chair site exists in a conference. Audio-only sites cannot request
chair control rights.
To request chair control rights, click Request Chair and enter
the conference control password, that is, the chair password.
NOTE
Obtain the conference control password from the SMC administrator or
the site that initiates the conference.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Conferenc
e Control
Function
Applica
ble
Role
Description
Request
Floor
Non-cha
ir site
If a non-chair site wants to speak during a conference, the site
can request the floor from the chair site. This function is
especially useful when a remote site is being broadcast.
This function is available only when a chair site exists in the
conference. After a site requests the floor, the request is
submitted to the chair site. The chair site can then determine
whether to give the floor to the site.
View Site
Non-cha
ir site
To give the floor to the requesting site, the chair site clicks
Sites Requesting Floor and clicks the site in the list. The site
is broadcast, and all the sites, except the chair site and the site
given the floor, are muted.
If the chair site does not give the floor to the requesting site,
the conference status remains unchanged.
Non-chair site: can use this function when no site or
continuous presence is being broadcast during a conference;
can view the sites residing on the local MCU or MCUs of the
same level only.
Chair site: can view any sites residing on the local MCU and
MCUs cascaded to the local MCU; can view a site even when
another site is being broadcast in continuous presence.
Chair
site
To view a single site, click View Site and select the site or
continuous presence to view.
To view sites in turn, click View Site, select In Turn on the
View Site page, select the sites to view one by one, and click
Start Viewing Sites in Turn. To stop viewing sites in turn, click
Stop Viewing Sites in Turn.
Revoke
Chair
Site that
initiates
the
conferen
ce
Click Revoke Chair. When chair control rights are revoked, no
chair site exists in the conference. Sites in the conference can
then request to chair the conference.
Call Site
Chair
site
You can place a call to a site that is not in the conference. The
site joins the conference after answering the call.
Call All
To call an absent site, click Call Site. To call all absent sites
included in the conference site list into the conference, click Call
All.
The status of a successfully connected site changes from
to
Add Site
Chair
site
You can add sites to an ongoing conference, regardless of
whether those sites have been defined in the address book. The
MCU hosting the conference then places calls to the added sites.
To add sites from the local or LDAP address book or add sites
that have not been defined in the address book, click Add Site.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Conferenc
e Control
Function
Applica
ble
Role
Description
Delete Site
Chair
site
To delete an absent site or a site that has joined the conference,
click Delete Site, select the site, and confirm the operation.
The chair site can disconnect a site from the conference and
remove the site from the site list. To enable the site to join the
conference again, the chair site must add the site to the
conference by performing the Add Site operation.
Hang Up
Chair
site
To disconnect a site that has joined the conference, click Hang
Up, select the site, and confirm the operation. After a site is
disconnected, the site still belongs to the conference but is
marked with
. To have the site join the conference again, the
chair site can perform the Call Site operation.
Broadcast
Site
Chair
site
The chair site can broadcast any non-audio-only site, including
the chair site itself, or broadcast multiple sites in turn.
To broadcast a single site, click Broadcast Site and select the
site to broadcast. When a site is broadcast, all non-chair sites are
forced to view the video of the broadcast site while the chair site
can view the video of any site that is present at the conference.
To stop broadcasting a site, perform Stop Broadcasting or
Discussion operation.
To broadcast sites in turn, click In Turn, select In Turn on the
Broadcast Site page, select the sites to broadcast one by one, and
click Start Broadcasting Sites in Turn. When multiple sites are
broadcast in turn, all sites are forced to view the video of the
broadcast sites. To stop broadcasting sites in turn, click Stop
Broadcasting Sites in Turn.
End
Conference
Chair
site
If a conference is completed before the scheduled time, the chair
site can use the End Conference function to end the conference
in advance.
Set
Continuous
Presence
Chair
site
View multiple sites at the same time.
The continuous presence function is used to display the video
from two or more sites on the same display at the same time. The
number of the sites to be displayed and the layout of the site
videos vary according to continuous presence modes.
This function is available only when continuous presence
resources have been reserved for the conference.
Click Set Continuous Presence, and choose a layout mode from
the Layout drop-down list box on the Set Continuous Presence
page. You can click a site to display the site in the highlighted
pane as required.
Mute/Unm
ute Speaker
Chair
site
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
To disable the speaker of a site, click Mute Speaker and
select the site. The site is marked with
other sites in the conference.
and cannot hear
To enable the speaker of a site, click Unmute Speaker and
select the site. Then the site can hear other sites in the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Conferenc
e Control
Function
Applica
ble
Role
4 Conference Experience
Description
conference.
Mute/Unm
ute MIC
Chair
site
and select the site. The site is marked with
heard by other sites in the conference.
Voice
activation
Chair
site
To disable the microphone of a site, click Mute Microphone
and cannot be
To enable the microphone of a site, click Unmute
Microphone and select the site. Then the site can be heard by
other sites in the conference.
Voice activation is used in discussion mode. When voice
activation is enabled, the site with the loudest voice is displayed
to other sites in the conference.
To enable voice activation, click Voice activation, set
Sensitivity on the Voice activation page based on your
experience, and click Start.
High: Voice activation threshold volume is low.
Medium: Voice activation threshold volume is set to a
medium level.
Low: Voice activation is performed when the voice volume is
high.
After you enable voice activation and set the sensitivity:
If the sound of one or multiple sites exceeds the voice
activation threshold defined on the MCU, the video of the
loudest site is broadcast.
If the voice activation threshold is not exceeded, the
conference status is not changed.
To disable the voice activation function, click Disable.
Lock
Presentatio
Chair
site
Restrict the presentation sharing rights of a site or a conference.
Locking site presentation: When the chair site locks the
presentation rights of a site, only that site can share
presentations.
Locking conference presentation: When the chair site locks
the conference presentation, a site can share its presentation if
no other site in the conference is doing so.
To cancel locking, click Unlock Presentation.
NOTE
Before using this function, ensure that the MCU and service software
used with your endpoint support this function.
Extend
Conference
Chair
site
If a conference is not likely to be complete by the scheduled time,
click Extend Conference, set Extension time (in min.) on the
Extend Conference page, and click OK to extend the conference
for the specified time.
Before extending a conference, you must ensure that the
videoconferencing resources and your account balance are
sufficient to cover an extension. To increase the chances of
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Conferenc
e Control
Function
Applica
ble
Role
4 Conference Experience
Description
success, extend the conference by 30 minutes at most at a time.
Revoke
Presentatio
Chair
site
Discussion
Chair
site
To stop a site from sharing a presentation, the chair site can
revoke the presentation sharing right of the site.
This function is available in a dual-stream conference.
The chair site can enable discussion to cancel certain ongoing site
control or conference control operations, such as broadcasting
sites.
This Discussion function is used to cancel the following
operations performed by the chair site:
Broadcasting a site
Muting the speaker
Muting the microphone
Giving the floor
In discussion mode:
Give Floor
Chair
site
Audio: All sites have unmuted microphones, and the sound of
all the sites together are broadcast to every site.
Video: The video viewed by each site does not change and
each site can view any other site.
Using this function, the chair site can give the floor to a site and
mute all other sites.
After the chair site gives the floor to a site, the video and sound
of the site are broadcast, and all sites are muted, except the chair
site and the site that has the floor.
Although the Stop Broadcasting function is available even when
a site has the floor, the chair site cannot take back the floor using
Stop Broadcasting. After the chair site gives the floor to a site,
the video and sound of the site are broadcast, and all sites are
muted, except the chair site and the site that has the floor. If the
chair site clicks Stop Broadcasting at this time, broadcasting a
site stops, but the other non-chair sites are still muted.
Sites
Requesting
Floor
Chair
site
During a conference, after a non-chair requests the floor, the site
is added to the floor-requesting sites list. The chair site can select
a site from the list to give the floor to that site. The video of that
site is then broadcast, and the microphones of all sites are muted,
except the chair site and the site that has the floor.
Once given the floor, the site is removed from the
floor-requesting sites list.
Release
Chair
Chair
site
Releases chair control rights. When chair control rights are
released, any sites in the conference can request to become the
chair site.
Monitor
Video
All sites
View the video and presentation of a remote site in real time.
You can also adjust the sizes of the video and presentation. In
this way, you can monitor the status and video quality of the
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Conferenc
e Control
Function
Applica
ble
Role
4 Conference Experience
Description
remote site.
You can also monitor the video from the page described in
section 5.1 Viewing the Video.
NOTE
The video and presentation can be viewed in real time only when the
video monitoring function is enabled. This function involves personal
privacy. Ensure that its use complies with local laws and regulations.
Recording
Chair
site
From the conference control page, click Start to start recording
and Stop to stop recording.
NOTE
To ensure rights of sites, read the instructions and suggestions for using
recording products in the latest HUAWEI RSE6500 Security Maintenance
before using the products.
Controlling a Multipoint Conference Hosted by a Built-in MCU
Table 4-11 lists the conference control functions available in a multipoint conference hosted
by a built-in MCU.
Table 4-11 Conference control functions
Conferenc
e Control
Function
Applicabl
e Role
Description
Request
Chair
Non-chair
site
For details, see Table 4-10.
Enable
Chair
Control
endpoint to
which the
built-in
MCU
belongs
NOTE
Obtain the conference control password from the endpoint to which the
built-in MCU belongs.
The sites in the conference can request chair control rights
only after you enable the chair control on the endpoint. After a
site becomes the chair site, the following conference control
functions are unavailable to the endpoint:
Lock conference
Conference video layout
Recording
You can use the preceding conference control functions on the
endpoint only after click Disable Chair Control.
Disable
Chair
Control
endpoint to
which the
built-in
MCU
belongs
This function is used to disable chair control in a conference.
For example, if a chair site exists in a conference, the site
whose built-in MCU is being used can use this function to
revoke chair control rights. In addition, the sites in the
conference cannot request to become the chair site afterward.
Lock
endpoint to
The Lock conference operation can be performed only from
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Conferenc
e Control
Function
Applicabl
e Role
Description
conference
which the
built-in
MCU
belongs
(when no
chair site
exists in
the
conference
the endpoint whose built-in MCU is being used. After the
Lock conference operation is performed, the endpoint whose
built-in MCU is being used can call the other endpoints to join
the conference, but other endpoints cannot call into the
conference. To enable other endpoints to call into the
conference, perform the Unlock Conference operation.
Conference
Video
Layout
endpoint to
which the
built-in
MCU
belongs
(when no
chair site
exists in
the
conference
This function is used to set the view displayed to all sites.
Voice activated, full screen: The remote sites view, in full
screen, the video of the site that generates the loudest
volume.
Voice activated, in panes: The remote sites view
continuous presence, with the main pane displaying the
video of the site that generates the loudest volume.
Bisect: The remote sites view, in bisect mode, the videos of
the other sites. The site that generates the louder volume is
highlighted. A presentation will not be displayed in this
layout.
Fixed site, full screen: The remote sites view, in full
screen, the video of a specified site. To view a site in full
screen, click it in the site list.
Fixed sites, in panes: The remote sites view continuous
presence, with the main pane displaying the video of a
specified site. To add a site to the main pane, click it in the
site list.
Chair site
NOTE
 After you set this parameter, the viewed site views other sites in
full screen or continuous presence mode.
This function is available only for H.323 sites where the endpoints
in V100R001C10 are used.
This function cannot be performed by the following sites at the
same time:
Recording
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
endpoint to
which the
built-in
MCU
belongs
(when no
chair site
exists in
the
Chair site
Site where the built-in MCU is used (in a conference
hosted by a built-in MCU and not chaired by any site)
For details, see Table 4-10.
NOTE
This function is available only for H.323 sites where the endpoints in
V100R001C10 are used. To ensure rights of sites, read the instructions
and suggestions for using recoridng products in the latest HUAWEI
RSE6500 Security Maintenance before using the products.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Conferenc
e Control
Function
Applicabl
e Role
4 Conference Experience
Description
conference
Chair site
End
Conference
endpoint to
which the
built-in
MCU
belongs
For details, see Table 4-10.
Chair site
Release
Chair
Chair site
For details, see Table 4-10.
Delete Site
Add Site
On the conference control page, you can also perform the following operations:
If the sites in a conference have been classified into groups in a site template, you can select a
group from the
drop-down list box. Then, the sites in the
selected group are displayed in the preset mode. For details about how to set site groups, see
6.4 Customizing a Site Template.
4.11 Recording a Conference
Your endpoint can record local and multipoint conferences.
Prerequisites
To ensure rights of participants, read the instructions and suggestions for using recoridng
products in the latest HUAWEI RSE6500 Security Maintenance before using the products.
Table 4-12 Recording prerequisites
Conference Type
Recording Prerequisites
Local conference
The recording server IP address or URL is set
on the endpoint.
Multipoint conference hosted by a
Huawei standalone MCU (such as the
HUAWEI VP9660 MCU)
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
The recording server is online.
NOTE
Check the recording server's online status from the
Service Management Center (SMC).
The endpoint and the recording server have
registered with a GK server.
Support recording is selected. For details,
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Conference Type
4 Conference Experience
Recording Prerequisites
see 4.2.2 Initiating a Conference from the
Predefined Conference Page.
Multipoint conference hosted by a
built-in MCU
The recording server IP address or URL is set
on the endpoint.
Background
During recording of local conferences, the endpoint cannot place or answer calls.
During recording of local conferences, you can perform Start, Pause, Resume, and Stop
operations. During recording of multipoint conferences, you can perform Start and Stop
operations.
When a Huawei standalone MCU is used to host a conference, you can enable or disable
live broadcast and recording for the conference.
When a built-in MCU is used to host a conference, you can enable or disable recording
for the conference.
During a multipoint conference, the chair site and the site where the built-in MCU is
used can perform recording operations.
To record a local conference, follow the following steps in this section. To record a
multipoint conference, see 4.10 Controlling a Conference.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Conference > Control Recording.
Step 2 Click Start.
The recording starts.
----End
To stop recording, click Stop.
4.12 Sending and Receiving Instant Messages
During a conference, you can send instant messages to remote sites and view or close the
instant messages sent from remote sites.
Prerequisites
Your endpoint is in a conference.
Your endpoint uses H.323. Only H.323 sites can send and receive instant messages.
T.140 captions have been enabled on your endpoint, because instant messages are a type
of T.140 caption. To enable T.140 captions, choose System Settings > Display >
Caption and set Sharing mode to T.140.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
4 Conference Experience
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Conference > Instant Message.
Step 2 In the displayed Instant Message dialog box, enter a message.
Step 3 Select the desired remote sites and click Send.
The message is sent to the remote sites. When receiving the message, the remote sites can
view and close the message.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
Device Control
About This Chapter
After a conference starts, you can control the video and audio devices on the endpoint web
interface to obtain the expected conference effect.
5.1 Viewing the Video
After the video monitoring function is enabled, you can view the video and presentation of
local and remote sites on the endpoint web interface.
5.2 Controlling a Camera
You can perform pan, tilt, and zoom (PTZ) control over a local or remote camera.
5.3 Setting a Camera Preset
Camera presets are camera positions you set and save ahead of time. A camera preset stores
the pan, tilt, and zoom settings of the camera. You can easily control the camera by switching
between camera presets. You can configure remote camera presets before and during
conferences.
5.4 Selecting Video Sources
The endpoint provides multiple video input ports for connecting to video devices. When
multiple video devices are connected, you can set one video device as the local video source
and another one as the local presentation source. You can also select the video or presentation
to be displayed through video output ports.
5.5 Controlling Audio
On your endpoint, you can adjust the audio effects. For example, you can adjust the volume of
the microphone and speaker.
5.6 Setting the Combined Picture
With the combined picture function, you can view multiple videos (such as the local and
remote videos and presentations) in Picture in Picture (PiP) or split-screen mode on one
display.
5.7 Setting Camera Parameters
On your endpoint, you can set the camera parameters, including video mode, noise reduction,
and video resolution. You can view the video result of your settings on the display connected
to your endpoint.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
5.8 Setting Preferred Video Parameters
If you find that the displayed video deviates from its normal position, adjust the picture offset.
If a blurring or slight jitter issue occurs in the video, adjust the sampling phase.
5.9 Setting Up a PPPoE Dial-Up Connection
Correct IP parameter settings on your endpoint enable you to set up a PPPoE dial-up
connection with a broadband network to communicate with other network devices.
5.10 Using the Remote Control
You can use a virtual remote control on the web interface to control your endpoint.
5.1 Viewing the Video
After the video monitoring function is enabled, you can view the video and presentation of
local and remote sites on the endpoint web interface.
Prerequisites
The video monitoring function has been enabled. This function can be enabled only on the
remote controlled UI. To enable the video monitoring function, choose Advanced >
Settings > Secured > Web Login and select Monitor video.
This function involves personal privacy. Ensure that its use complies with local laws and
regulations.
Procedure
Log in to the web interface, choose Device Control > Device Control, and click the Video
Control tab to view the video of local and remote sites, as shown in Figure 5-1.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
Figure 5-1 Viewing the video
You can click the drop-down list box to select the video source to view, or click Capture to
capture a picture of the video that is being played.
5.2 Controlling a Camera
You can perform pan, tilt, and zoom (PTZ) control over a local or remote camera.
Prerequisites
You are familiar with the following buttons for camera control:
: Turns the camera upward, downward, leftward, and rightward.
: Turns the camera forward.
: Enlarges the image taken by a camera.
: Zooms in on a scene.
: Shrinks the image taken by a camera.
: Zooms out on a scene.
: Automatically adjusts the camera focus.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
Step 2 In the upper right corner of the Video Control page, select the camera you want to control, as
shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Camera control
When your endpoint is not in a conference, you can select only Local camera.
When your endpoint is in a conference, you can select Local camera or Remote camera.
By default, Local camera is selected.
When Monitor video is enabled, the video delivered from the camera under control is displayed in the
upper left corner of the Video Control page. You can then view the camera output while you control the
camera.
Step 3 Click the controls shown in Figure 5-2 to control cameras.
----End
When the desired video is displayed on the monitor, you can save the camera settings as a
preset so you can easily switch to the preset in the future. For details about how to set a
camera preset, see 5.3 Setting a Camera Preset.
5.3 Setting a Camera Preset
Camera presets are camera positions you set and save ahead of time. A camera preset stores
the pan, tilt, and zoom settings of the camera. You can easily control the camera by switching
between camera presets. You can configure remote camera presets before and during
conferences.
Prerequisites
You are familiar with how to control a camera. For details, see 5.2 Controlling a Camera.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
Background
Table 5-1 lists the camera preset details.
Table 5-1 Camera preset details
Endpoint
Number of Camera
Presets
Data Is Lost After Restart
Local
30
No
Remote
Dynamically adjustable
Yes
Saving a Camera Preset
Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Video Control tab.
On the displayed Video Control page, the camera control area is on the right side.
Step 2 Adjust the camera pan, tilt, and zoom settings until the desired video is displayed on the
monitor. Refer to 5.2 Controlling a Camera.
Step 3 Click the Save Preset tab, as shown in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 Setting a Camera Presets
Step 4 Select a number and click Confirm.
: indicates that the number has not been set for a preset. After you select this
number and confirm the selection, the number is used for the current preset.
: indicates that the number has been set for a preset. After you select this number
and confirm the selection, the current preset will overwrite the original preset.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
----End
Switching Between Camera Presets
Step 1 On the Video Control page, click Switch Preset.
Step 2 Under Switch Preset, select a number corresponding to a preset, and click Confirm.
----End
Removing a Camera Preset
Step 1 On the Video Control page, click Save Preset tab.
Step 2 Under Save Preset, select the number corresponding to the preset you want to remove, and
click Clear.
----End
5.4 Selecting Video Sources
The endpoint provides multiple video input ports for connecting to video devices. When
multiple video devices are connected, you can set one video device as the local video source
and another one as the local presentation source. You can also select the video or presentation
to be displayed through video output ports.
Prerequisites
To set the computer desktop as a video input source, ensure that you have set the computer
video to a video resolution and refresh rate that your endpoint supports. For details, see 7.3.5
Configuring Video Output.
Background
Selecting video input sources
A video device can be a document camera, computer, record and playback device, or
DVD player. If you have connected multiple video devices to the input ports on your
endpoint, select local video and presentation sources from these connected devices.
The endpoint adopts difference policies to deliver the video and presentation based on
on-site situations:
−
In single-screen display mode, if no presentation is shared during a conference,
remote sites view the conference video of the local site; if a presentation is shared,
both the local and remote sites view the presentation.
−
In dual-screen mode, the display device connected to the main output port delivers
the video while the display device connected to the auxiliary output port delivers the
presentation.
−
During the layout switch in combined picture or continuous presence mode, remote
sites can always view the conference video of the local site.
For details about how to set video input ports, see 7.3.2 Configuring Video Input.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Selecting video output sources
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
During a conference, you can manually switch between the local video, local
presentation, remote video, and remote presentation to be displayed through a video
output port.
For details about how to set video output ports, see 7.3.5 Configuring Video Output.
Selecting the Video Source and Presentation Source
Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Video Control tab.
Step 2 In the lower left corner of the Video Control page, click the Video Input Source tab.
Step 3 Set Video Source and Presentation Source.
You can set the local video source to multi-view mode. For details about multi-view mode
settings, see 7.3.3 Setting the Multi-View Mode.
----End
Selecting the Video Output Source
Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Video Control tab.
Step 2 In the lower right corner of the Video Control page, click the Video Output Source tab.
Step 3 Select the video or presentation to be displayed through video output ports.
----End
5.5 Controlling Audio
On your endpoint, you can adjust the audio effects. For example, you can adjust the volume of
the microphone and speaker.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Audio Control tab.
Step 2 Set the audio control parameters listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Audio control parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Audio Input
Turns on or off all audio input sources.
The default value is Unmute.
MIC 1
Adjusts the microphone volume at your
site. When you adjust this microphone
volume, the volume heard at remote sites
is adjusted accordingly.
The default value is +0dB.
Adjusts the input volume of the RCA
port at your site. When you adjust this
input volume, the volume heard at
The default value is +0dB.
Audio Input
MIC 2 (only
TE60)
RCA L
RCA R
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB
Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB
52
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
5 Device Control
Setting
remote sites is adjusted accordingly.
Adjusts the input volume of the HDML
port at your site. When you adjust this
input volume, the volume heard at
remote sites is adjusted accordingly.
HDMI L
HDMI R
The default value is +0dB.
Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB
NOTE
This parameter is available only when the
HDMI port of the endpoint is connected to an
input source.
DP L (only
TE60)
Adjusts the input volume of the DP port
at your site. When you adjust this input
volume, the volume heard at remote sites
is adjusted accordingly.
DP R (only
TE60)
The default value is +0dB.
Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB
NOTE
This parameter is available only when the DP
port of the endpoint is connected to an input
source.
LINE IN L
(only TE50)
The default value is +0dB.
LINE IN R
(only TE50)
Adjusts the input volume of the LINE IN
port at your site. When you adjust this
input volume, the volume heard at
remote sites is adjusted accordingly.
Microphone
array 1
Displays the microphone array volumes
and battery levels in real time.
Speaker
Mutes or unmutes the speaker at your
site. To hear other sites, unmute the
speaker.
The default value is Unmute.
Volume
Adjusts the output volume heard at your
site. If both left and right audio channels
are available, the volume of both
channels is adjusted at the same time.
The default value is 15.
Value range: 0-21
Increases or decreases the alert tone
The default value is 3.
Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB
MIC array 1
battery level
Microphone
array 2
MIC array 2
battery level
Microphone
array 3(only
TE60)
MIC array 3
battery
level(only
TE60)
Audio Output
Alert tone
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
Parameter
Description
Setting
volume
volume.
Value range: 0-3
Locally
output sound
from
AUDIO IN
Specifies whether to allow the audio
input from the LINE IN port, the HDMI
port, or the RCA port to be heard at your
site.
The default value is Mute.
AUDIOIN
remote
output
Specifies whether to allow the audio
input from the LINE IN port, the HDMI
port, or the RCA port to be heard at
remote sites.
The default value is Unmute.
SPDIF
Specifies whether you can hear the sound
from the local SPDIF digital audio port
at your site. To hear the sound, set this
parameter to Unmute.
The default value is Mute.
AUDIO IN
echo
cancellation
If echo cancellation is enabled, the
endpoint removes echo in the audio input
from the MIC 1 and MIC 2 (only TE60)
interfaces.
The default value is Mute.
Music Mode
Specifies whether to enable the MIC 1
and MIC 2 (only TE60) to pick up the
music that is playing at the local site to
provide a better listening experience.
The default value is Mute.
Bass
Adjusts the gain of bass, middle, and
treble tones.
The default value is +0dB.
Adjusts the volume of a PSTN call at
your site. When you adjust this volume,
the volume heard at remote sites is
adjusted accordingly.
The default value is +0dB.
Specifies whether all sites (including
PSTN sites such as mobile phones) in a
conference can hear each other.
The default value is Enable. If
you retain the default value, all
sites in a conference can hear
each other.
Sound Effect
Middle
Value range: -6 dB to +6 dB
Treble
PSTN
PSTN
Mix PSTN
audio
Value range: -12 dB to +12 dB
Retain the default value when
your endpoint joins a
multipoint conference as a
PSTN site.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
5.6 Setting the Combined Picture
With the combined picture function, you can view multiple videos (such as the local and
remote videos and presentations) in Picture in Picture (PiP) or split-screen mode on one
display.
Prerequisites
Two or more of the following video sources are available: local video, local presentation,
remote video, and remote presentation.
Background
You can view multiple videos on one display at the same time. The positions, sizes, and
combination of these images are configurable.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Combined Picture tab.
Step 2 Click Switch Video.
Videos are displayed in the mode you select.
----End
5.7 Setting Camera Parameters
On your endpoint, you can set the camera parameters, including video mode, noise reduction,
and video resolution. You can view the video result of your settings on the display connected
to your endpoint.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Camera parameters adjustment
tab.
Step 2 Set the camera parameters listed in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 Camera parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Camera
input
interface
Specifies the endpoint's video input port
to which the camera is to be connected.
The default value is 1 MAIN
IN.
Exposure
mode
Specifies the mode for using natural
light. You can select either of the
following modes:
The default value is Auto.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Auto: The camera automatically
selects the optimum configuration
based on the surrounding
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
5 Device Control
Setting
environment.
White
balance
Picture
mode
Manual: You need to manually
adjust Brightness gain, Shutter
speed, and Iris.
Iris priority: When you manually
adjust the aperture, the camera selects
the corresponding shutter rate.
Shutter priority: When you
manually adjust the shutter rate, the
camera selects the corresponding
aperture. This mode is mainly used to
shoot moving objects.
Specifies the white balance to enable the
camera to accurately recognize the color
white and deliver more vivid videos.
Auto: The camera automatically
calculates and outputs the value using
color information from the entire
screen.
One-push: This is a fixed white
balance mode. Once you select this
mode, the value is automatically
adjusted. This mode assumes that the
camera shoots a white subject
occupying more than 1/2 of the
image, under correct light conditions.
The mode is lost when the endpoint is
powered off. You have to reset this
mode after the endpoint is powered
on.
Manual: This is a manual white
balance mode. You automatically
control the red gain and blue gain that
range from -128 to 127.
Specifies the output video display effect.
Standard: reproduces video more
faithfully.
Vivid: delivers brighter video with
cooler colors.
Natural: delivers video with warmer
colors.
User defined: delivers video with
custom settings. After you select this
option, you can set the following
parameters.
−
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
The default value is Auto.
The default value is Standard.
Aperture: sharpens video edges
and contours to preserve the
impression of clarity and fine
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
5 Device Control
Setting
details. Over-sharpening will
make video less realistic.
−
Brightness: specifies the video
output level that changes the
brightness of the video displayed
on the monitor.
−
Hue: adjusts the video color.
−
Saturation: adjusts the grayscale
of each color. The higher the
saturation, the brighter a color.
Noise
reduction
Removes noise artifacts from video. A
larger value causes the video to have less
noise but detail may also be lost.
The default value is Low.
Set output
resolution
automaticall
Specifies whether the camera
automatically sets the video output
resolution.
The default value is Disable.
Video
resolution
Specifies the video output resolution for
the camera. This parameter is available
only when Set output resolution
automatically is set to Disable.
The default value is 1080p
60Hz.
Image
inversion
Specifies whether the video input from
the camera is rotated by 180 degrees.
When the camera is hung, set this
parameter to Enable.
The default value is Disable.
----End
5.8 Setting Preferred Video Parameters
If you find that the displayed video deviates from its normal position, adjust the picture offset.
If a blurring or slight jitter issue occurs in the video, adjust the sampling phase.
Background
VGA or YPbPr image offset may occur in video input or output, such as when the computer
desktop is displayed on the display device.
A blurring or slight jitter issue may occur in the video displayed on the display device. In this
case, you can set the sampling phase to adjust the color.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Preference–Video tab.
Step 2 Adjust the video parameters described in Table 5-4.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
Table 5-4 Video parameters
Parameter
Setting
Image Offset
Select Horizontal offset or Vertical offset
and drag the slider to adjust the image offset
on the video input and output ports.
Sampling Phase
Drag the slider to adjust the sampling phase
for the video input port.
Small window position offset
Drag the slider to adjust the offset for the
Picture in Picture (PiP) window.
Output Adjustment
Drag the slider to adjust the size of the
output video. If your monitor specifications
are low, and the video output from the
endpoint does not display properly, set this
parameter to fix the display issue.
Before setting this parameter, make sure:
Adjust presentation resolution
The endpoint is connected to the monitor
using a standard cable.
The Extended Display Identification
Data (EDID) from the monitor can be
correctly read by the endpoint.
Drag the slider to adjust the resolution of
the presentation. Dragging the slider left
blurs the presentation, and dragging the
slider right sharpens it.
----End
5.9 Setting Up a PPPoE Dial-Up Connection
Correct IP parameter settings on your endpoint enable you to set up a PPPoE dial-up
connection with a broadband network to communicate with other network devices.
Prerequisites
You have set PPPoE to Enable.
You have entered the user name and password that are provided by your broadband
access service provider in User name and Password respectively.
You have set Dialing mode to Manual.
If Dialing mode is set to Disable, the endpoint automatically sets up a PPPoE dial-up connection.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Device Control > PPPoE Dialing.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
5 Device Control
The PPPoE Dialing page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Dial.
To cancel a PPPoE dial-up connection, set PPPoE to Disable.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When a PPPoE dial-up connection is set up, your endpoint has a new IP address. Use this IP
address the next time you want to log in to the endpoint web interface.
To obtain your endpoint IP address, access the home screen of the user interface controlled by
the remote control and choose Advanced > Settings > Network > IP > Local IP address.
5.10 Using the Remote Control
You can use a virtual remote control on the web interface to control your endpoint.
Choose Device Control > Use Remote Control and click the desired button on the virtual
remote control.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
6 Managing the Local Address Book
Managing the Local Address Book
About This Chapter
The address book stores site information. You can add, edit, and delete site entries. The
address book saves time because you do not need to enter site information to initiate a
conference and prevents entry of incorrect IP addresses.
6.1 Editing the Local Address Book
From the address book page, you can add a site or group, search for and sort the sites.
6.2 Using Virtual Conference Rooms
From a standalone MCU, the administrator can reserve conference resources, schedule a
conference without predefined sites, and assign the conference a number (the virtual
conference room number).
6.3 Importing and Exporting Address Book
From the endpoint web interface, you can export the local address book to the local computer
or a server. You can also import the modified address book to the endpoint, after which the
records in the address book are displayed on the address book page.
6.4 Customizing a Site Template
A site template is used to group sites for easy site management. In this template, the sites are
identified by their site names.
6.1 Editing the Local Address Book
From the address book page, you can add a site or group, search for and sort the sites.
Adding a Site
Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book.
Step 2 Click Add Site and set the site parameters listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Site parameters
Parameter
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Description
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Setting
60
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
6 Managing the Local Address Book
Parameter
Description
Setting
Name
Specifies the name of the site. This site
name is superimposed on the site video.
The value can contain a
maximum of 64 characters,
including digits, letters, and
special characters.
Category
Specifies the conferencing scenario of
the site.
The default value is Ordinary
site.
Type
Rate
Ordinary site: Select this option for
a traditional videoconferencing site.
Telepresence site: Select this option
for a Huawei three-screen
telepresence site.
CT site: Select this option for a Cisco
TelePresence site.
Specifies the type of the line the site uses
to access the videoconferencing network.
If you select IP, your endpoint will
use the protocol set for Preferred IP
protocol to call the site.
If you set Category to CT site, the
available value for Type is SIP.
Specifies the data transmission rate of
the line selected for the remote endpoint.
The default value is H.323.
Select the highest available data
transmission rate.
The supported data transmission rates
vary depending on the type of the site
you want to call.
Country/Reg
ion code
Specifies the country or area where the
site is located.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
This parameter is available only for
integrated services digital network
(ISDN) and public switched telephone
network (PSTN) sites.
Area code
Specifies the area code for the site.
This parameter is available only for
ISDN and PSTN sites.
Number
IP address
Specifies the site number used to place
calls between sites.
IP, E1, 4E1, ISDN, and H.323 phone
site numbers are allocated by the
videoconferencing service provider.
PSTN site numbers are telephone
numbers.
Specifies the IP address of the site.
NOTE
This parameter is unavailable if you set
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
61
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
6 Managing the Local Address Book
Description
Setting
Category to CT site.
URI
Specifies the uniform resource identifier
(URI) of the site, for example,
abcd@huawei.com.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
NOTE
This parameter is available only when Type
is set to IP, H.323, or SIP.
Line 1 #1
Line 1 #2
Line 2 #1
Specify the numbers your endpoint uses
to call the site. These parameters are
available only for ISDN sites.
If the ISDN site rate is set to a value
ranging from 64 kbit/s to 2048 kbit/s,
set Line 1 #1 only, because you only
need to dial that number to call the
site.
If the ISDN site rate is set to 2, 3, 4,
5, or 6 x 64 kbit/s, set the other
required parameters as well, because
you need to dial the BRI line numbers
one by one to call the site. For
example, when the ISDN site rate is
set to 2 x 64 kbit/s, set the first two
parameters Line 1 #1 and Line 1 #2;
when the ISDN site rate is set to 3 x
64 kbit/s, set the first three
parameters Line 1 #1, Line 1 #2, and
Line 2 #1, and so forth. Line 1 #2
specifies the second number of the
first BRI line.
Line 2 #2
Line 3 #1
Line 3 #2
Sort ID
Specifies the sequence number of the site
in the address book.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
The default value is 0.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately. The new site is listed in the address book.
----End
Adding a Group
Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book.
Step 2 Click Add Group. In Name, enter the group name.
Step 3 Select one or more sites and click
The selected sites are displayed under Group Members.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
6 Managing the Local Address Book
To delete a site listed in Group Members, select the site and click
To delete all sites, click
Step 4 Click Save.
The new group is listed in the address book.
----End
Managing Address Records
Searching for Records
In the search box, enter key words for an address and click
Modifying Records
Click the name of a site or group in the address book. On the displayed editing page,
modify the settings for the site or group.
Deleting Records
Select the site or group you want to delete and click Delete.
Sorting Records
If there are multiple sites on the address book page, conference-related pages, or other
pages, you can sort the sites based on their properties, such as by name, number, line
type, online status, and type.
From the site lists on some of these pages, you can click one of five letter ranges,
, to display the sites whose names start with letters within
that range.
6.2 Using Virtual Conference Rooms
From a standalone MCU, the administrator can reserve conference resources, schedule a
conference without predefined sites, and assign the conference a number (the virtual
conference room number).
Background
The virtual conference room function simplifies the process of initiating multipoint
conferences from the endpoint in the following aspects:
A virtual conference room can be configured with an easy-to-remember access number
for sites to dial to join the conference.
From the Virtual Conference Room page, users can search for virtual conference room
entries and call a virtual conference room found or save the record to the endpoint.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book and click the Virtual Conference Room tab.
Step 2 Perform any of the following operations:
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
6 Managing the Local Address Book
Select the virtual conference you want to delete and click Delete.
Select the virtual conference you want to call and click Call.
In the search box, enter key words for virtual conferences and click
. The virtual
conferences that meet the search criteria in the local address book are displayed.
Click Search for LDAP Address Book in the lower right corner to search the LDAP
address book for virtual conferences.
----End
6.3 Importing and Exporting Address Book
From the endpoint web interface, you can export the local address book to the local computer
or a server. You can also import the modified address book to the endpoint, after which the
records in the address book are displayed on the address book page.
Background
The exported address book is saved to a file in vCard format. The file name extension is .vcf.
When exporting the address book, you can specify the character encoding format to either of
the following:
China: The character set is GB2312.
Other countries: The character set is UTF-8.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Address Book > Address Book.
Step 2 Perform either of the following:
To import new entries to the local address book, click Import to Local Address Book.
To export the local address book, click Export from Local Address Book.
----End
6.4 Customizing a Site Template
A site template is used to group sites for easy site management. In this template, the sites are
identified by their site names.
Creating a Site Template
Step 1
Choose Address Book > Site Template.
Step 2 Click Create.
Step 3 In Template Name, enter a template name, for example, test.
Step 4 Add a group to the template, as the test template in the following example:
1.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Click Create Group.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
6 Managing the Local Address Book
The Add group group is displayed under Group Name.
2.
Double-click the Add group group and change the group name to, for example, group1.
Step 5 Add sites to the new group, as the group1 group in the following example:
Select group1 under Group Name. Click Add from Address Book to add sites from the
address book, or click Add Temporary Site to add temporary sites.
Step 6 Repeat Step 4 to add another group to the template.
Step 7 Repeat Step 5 to add sites to the new groups.
Step 8 Click Save.
After being saved, a site template is displayed under Template Name.
When one of the sites in the site template is in a conference, the site template name is listed in
the
drop-down list box on the Conference Control page.
----End
Editing a Site Template
Step 1 Choose Address Book > Site Template.
Step 2 From the Template Name drop-down list box, select the site template you want to edit. Click
Edit.
Step 3 Modify the settings of the site template.
Step 4 Click Save.
----End
Deleting a Site Template
Step 1 Choose Address Book > Site Template.
Step 2 Select the site template you want to delete.
Step 3 Click Delete.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
System Settings
About This Chapter
After the configuration wizard is complete, you can use the endpoint to initiate simple
conferences. You can also set advanced parameters for the endpoint on the endpoint web
interface based on your video and audio conference requirements.
The System Settings page is available only to the web interface administrator of the endpoint.
7.1 Setting Basic Parameters
Set basic parameters for the endpoint on the endpoint web interface, such as the system time
and functions of number keys on the remote control.
7.2 Specifying Caption Settings
Caption settings include the banner or caption type, position, size, background, and color.
7.3 Setting Video Parameters
You can set video input and output parameters on the endpoint web interface and set the
multi-view mode to achieve the desired video effect.
7.4 Configuring Audio
After connecting audio cables, set the audio parameters.
7.5 Specifying Conference Settings
Your endpoint is ready for videoconferencing with its default conference settings, but you can
customize the conference settings based on the site requirements.
7.6 Specifying Network Settings
The endpoint can communicate with other devices properly only after network settings are
specified on the endpoint web interface based on the network deployment of the endpoint.
7.7 Security
To improve communication security, you can encrypt conferences, set or change conference
passwords, and disable remote access to the endpoint.
7.8 Importing Security Certificates
Import certificates on the endpoint web interface to improve the communication security.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
7.9 Managing System Files
Manage system files on the endpoint interface to improve the operation and maintenance
(O%amp;M) efficiency of the endpoint.
7.1 Setting Basic Parameters
Set basic parameters for the endpoint on the endpoint web interface, such as the system time
and functions of number keys on the remote control.
7.1.1 Setting the System time
You must correctly set the system time of the endpoint for services to run properly.
Step 1 Choose System Settings > General.
Step 2 Click the Time and Time Zone tab and set the parameters listed in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Time and time zone parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Location
Specifies the country or area where your
endpoint is located.
The default value is China.
When you set this parameter, your
endpoint automatically adjusts the value
of the Time zone parameter.
Time zone
Specifies the time difference between the
local time and the Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
The default value is
(UTC+08:00) Beijing,
Chongqing, Hong Kong,
Urumqi.
Your endpoint automatically
sets this parameter based on the
value set for Location.
Time format
Specifies the format in which time is
displayed.
The default value is 24-hour.
Adjust time
automaticall
y based on
DST
Specifies whether to automatically adjust
the endpoint clock time to daylight
saving time (DST). When the DST is
enabled, the endpoint clock is adjusted 1
hour forward.
The default value is Disable.
NOTE
The presence of this parameter is controlled
by your settings of Time zone. This
parameter is available for countries and
regions that support DST.
Date format
Specifies the format in which the date is
displayed.
The default value is
YYYY/MM/DD.
Enable NTP
Specifies whether to automatically
synchronizes system time with a
The default value is Disable.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
Network Time Protocol (NTP) server at
an interval of 300 seconds.
NOTE
If you set this parameter to Enable NTP, you
must also set NTP server address.
NTP address
type
Specifies the mode for your endpoint to
obtain the NTP server IP address.
Auto: Your endpoint automatically
obtains the NTP server IP address.
Manual: You must manually set the
NTP server IP address.
The default value is Manual.
This parameter is available only when
Connection type is set to Dynamic IP.
NOTE
For details about how to set Connection
type, see 7.6.1 Setting IP Parameters.
NTP server
address
Specifies the NTP server IP address.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
System time
Specifies the time set on the system.
Set the system time to your
local time to ensure appropriate
use of system functions, such
as joining conferences on time
and recording accurate event
occurrence time in logs.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.1.2 Setting the Ringtone for Incoming Calls
When an incoming call arrives, the endpoint rings. You can set the desired ringtone.
Choose System Settings > General > Ringtone and select the desired ringtone.
7.1.3 Managing Power
The endpoint supports the sleep function to reduce power consumption. You can set the sleep
time so that the endpoint automatically enters sleep mode when it is idle for the specified
period of time. You can also set the scheduled power-on and power-off time.
Step 1 Choose System Settings > General.
Step 2 Click the Power management tab and set the parameters listed in Table 7-2.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Table 7-2 Basic parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Power management
Shut Down
Specifies whether the endpoint can be
powered off.
The default value is Enable.
If you set this parameter to Disable, you
can only restart the endpoint or place it
in sleep mode from Device Control >
Shut Down.
Enter sleep
mode
Specifies the period after which the
endpoint enters sleep mode if you do not
perform any operations.
If you set this parameter to
Never, the endpoint will never
automatically enter sleep mode.
The default value is After 10
min.
Scheduled
power-on
Specifies whether the endpoint
automatically powers on at the specified
time.
The default value is Disable.
NOTE
If you enable this function, you must also set
Scheduled power-on time (hh:mm).
Scheduled
power-on
time
(hh:mm)
Specifies the time when the endpoint
automatically powers on.
Scheduled
power-off
Specifies whether the endpoint
automatically powers off at the specified
time.
The value format depends on the value
set for Time format.
The default value is 0:0, which
corresponds to the 24-hour
value for Time format.
The default value is Disable.
NOTE
If you enable this function, you must also set
Scheduled power-off time (hh:mm).
Scheduled
power-off
time
(hh:mm)
Specifies the time when the endpoint
automatically powers off.
Wake-on-L
AN
Specifies whether you can remotely
wake up a standby or sleeping endpoint
by sending Wake on LAN (WOL)
messages.
The value format depends on the value
set for Time format.
The default value is 0:0, which
corresponds to the 24-hour
value for Time format.
The default value is Disable.
NOTE
A standby endpoint indicates that the power
switch on the endpoint's rear panel is in the
ON position and that the endpoint can be
turned off by pressing the power key on the
remote control.
Control TV
sleep mode
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Specifies whether you can turn on or off
the display connected to the endpoint. If
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The default value is Disable.
69
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
7 System Settings
Description
Setting
you enable this function and choose
Device Control > Shut Down, the
display will be turned off.
This parameter is available only when
Shut Down is set to Disable.
NOTE
If you enable this function, you must also set
Serial port 1-connected TV model and
Serial port 2-connected TV model.
Serial port
1-connected
TV model
Specify the types of displays connected
to the COM1 and COM2 ports at the
back of the endpoint.
Serial port
2-connected
TV model
The default value is TCL.
Set the parameters according to
the displays connected to the
COM1 and COM2 ports at the
back of the endpoint.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.1.4 Setting Number Key Functions
You can set the number keys on the remote control to facilitate your daily use of the endpoint.
To set the number keys choose System Settings > General > Select number key function.
When the endpoint is not in a conference and the display is showing the menus or
camera control screen, you can only control camera presets by pressing number keys on
the remote control.
When the endpoint is in a conference, you can select either of the following options:
−
Second Dial: Follow the instructions to press number keys to perform two-stage
dialing.
−
Control camera preset: On the menus or camera control screen, press a number key
to move the camera to the preset bound to that key.
To toggle between these two options, press
on the remote control for 3 seconds or more.
7.2 Specifying Caption Settings
Caption settings include the banner or caption type, position, size, background, and color.
Background
Your endpoint supports T.140 and non-T.140 captions. Table 7-3 describes the differences
between these caption types.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Table 7-3 Comparison between non-T.140 and T.140 captions
Non-T.140 Caption
T.140 Caption
Superimposed on the video of your
site and sent with the video to remote
sites
Not superimposed on the video of your site, sent to
remote sites, and displayed on remote displays
Can be sent and received by Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H.323
endpoints
Can be sent and received by H.323 endpoints only
Can be sent and received by all
endpoints
Can be sent and received only by endpoints that
support T.140 captions
Can be sent only from endpoints in a
conference
Can be sent from any of the following in a
conference:
Endpoint used at the chair site
SMC2.0
Endpoint used by either party during a
point-to-point call
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Display and click the Caption tab.
Step 2 Set the caption parameters listed in Table 7-4.
Table 7-4 Caption parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Sharing
mode
Specifies the type of the caption.
The default value is T.140.
Font size
For details about caption types, see Table
7-3.
Specifies the font size for the banners
and middle and bottom captions.
For middle and bottom
captions, the default value is
Medium.
For banners, the default value
is Largest.
Bold
Specifies whether the banners and
middle and bottom captions is displayed
in bold.
For middle and bottom
captions, the default value is
No.
For banners, the default value
is Yes.
Font Type
Specifies the font type of captions.
The default value is Boldface.
Settings of this parameter take effect
only when the language of the remote
controlled UI is set to simplified
Chinese.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
NOTE
To set the language of the remote controlled
UI, choose System Settings > Display >
GUI.
Height
Specifies the percentage of the banner or
bottom caption height to the entire
display.
The default value is 10%.
Transparenc
Specifies the banners and middle and
bottom captions transparency.
The default value is Half
transparent.
Line spacing
Specifies the vertical spacing between
lines of a middle caption.
The default value is Small.
Effect
Specifies the display effect for the
banners and middle and bottom captions.
For middle captions, the default
value is Scroll upward.
For bottom captions, the default
value is Scroll leftward.
For banners, the default value
is Center.
Scrolling
speed
Specifies the scroll rate for middle and
bottom captions.
The default value is Fast.
Background
color
Specifies the background color of the
banners and middle and bottom captions.
For middle and bottom
captions, the default color is
gray.
For banners, the default color is
red.
Up to 64 colors are supported.
Font color
Specifies the foreground color of the
banners and middle and bottom captions.
The default color is white.
Up to 64 colors are supported.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.3 Setting Video Parameters
You can set video input and output parameters on the endpoint web interface and set the
multi-view mode to achieve the desired video effect.
7.3.1 Understanding Video Input Capabilities
You must under the video input capabilities of the endpoint to correctly set video input
parameters.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
The endpoint supports various camera models, including the HUAWEI VPC600 HD camera
(VPC600), HUAWEI VPC620 HD camera (VPC620), ViewPoint C500 HD camera (C500),
HUAWEI VPC500 HD camera (VPC500), HUAWEI VPC520 HD camera (VPC520),
HUAWEI VPC500S camera (VPC500S), HUAWEI VPC500E camera (VPC500E), SONY
EVI-HD1, SONY EVI-D100, SONY EVI-D70, SONY D30/D31, SONY BRC-300P, SONY
BRC-H700, SONY BRC-Z330, CANON V50, CANON VCC1, CANON VCC4, 3CCD,
C200, GTP CAM, KX, PELCO, PTC100, SYYT, TAC, VCC-SW80P, and VCC-HD90P.
Table 7-5, Table 7-6, and Table 7-7 list the capabilities of the video input ports.
Table 7-5 Capabilities of the TE40's video input ports
Port Name
on the UI
Port
Number
on the
Rear
Panel
Type
Receivable
Input Format
Control
Description
1 MAIN IN
HD-VI
DVI(HW),
HDMI(HW),
and YPbPr(HW)
Camera
PTZ
None
2 PC IN
VGA
VGA and YPbPr
Camera
PTZ
HDMI
DVI and HDMI
Camera
PTZ
The VGA and
HDMI Port
ports are
mutually
exclusive and
cannot be used
at the same
time.
Table 7-6 Capabilities of the TE50's video input ports
Port Name
on the UI
Port
Numbe
r on the
Rear
Panel
Type
Receivable
Input Format
Control
Description
1 MAIN IN
RCA
CVBS
Camera
PTZ
HD-VI
DVI(HW),
HDMI(HW),
and
YPbPr(HW)
Camera
PTZ
The RCA and
HD-VI ports are
mutually exclusive
and cannot be used
at the same time.
VGA
VGA and
YPbPr
Camera
PTZ
HDMI
DVI and
HDMI
Camera
PTZ
2 PC IN
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The VGA and
HDMI Port ports
are mutually
exclusive and
cannot be used at
the same time.
73
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Port Name
on the UI
Port
Numbe
r on the
Rear
Panel
Type
Receivable
Input Format
Control
Description
3 3G-SDI IN
BNC
SDI
Camera
PTZ
None
Table 7-7 Capabilities of the TE60's video input ports
Port Name
on the UI
Port
Numbe
r on the
Rear
Panel
Type
Receivable
Input Format
Control
Description
1 MAIN IN
DVI-I
VGA, YPbPr,
DVI, HDMI,
CVBS, and
S-VIDEO
Camera
PTZ
HD-VI
DVI(HW),
HDMI(HW),
and
YPbPr(HW)
Camera
PTZ
The DVI-I and
HD-VI ports are
mutually exclusive
and cannot be used
at the same time.
DVI-I
VGA, YPbPr,
DVI, and
HDMI
Camera
PTZ
Display
Port
DP and HDMI
Camera
PTZ
HDMI
DVI and
HDMI
Camera
PTZ
HD-VI
DVI(HW) and
HDMI(HW)
Camera
PTZ
BNC
SDI
Camera
PTZ
2 PC IN
3 AUX IN
4 3G-SDI IN
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
The DVI-I and
Display Port ports
are mutually
exclusive and
cannot be used at
the same time.
The HDMI and
HD-VI ports are
mutually exclusive
and cannot be used
at the same time.
None
PTZ is an acronym for Pan, Tilt, and Zoom. A PTZ camera supports panning, tilting, and zooming
control.
The HD-VI port can only be connected to the HUAWEI VPC600 or VPC620. After connecting this
port to the HUAWEI VPC600 or VPC620, you can perform PTZ controls on and supply power to
the HUAWEI VPC600 or VPC620 without additional cables.
If you connect a port other than the HD-VI port to the camera, you must connect the cable used for
transmitting VISCA control signals to the COM port on your endpoint to perform PTZ controls on
the camera.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Each input port to be used for transmitting a video or a presentation can be specified on the
user interface. For details, see section 5.4 Selecting Video Sources.
7.3.2 Configuring Video Input
Correct video input settings enable your endpoint to properly display video input from the
video input ports.
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Input/Output and click the Video Input tab.
Step 2 Set the video input parameters listed in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Video input parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Remote
control
Specifies whether a remote site can
control the local camera during a call.
The default value is Allow.
Video
Source
Manageme
nt
Specifies whether you can select the
video source and presentation source on
the remote controlled UI.
The default value is Do not
allow.
Press the
key on the remote
control to select the video source and
presentation source only after you enable
this parameter.
Selecting an incorrect video
source may result in black
screens. To avoid mistakenly
selecting an incorrect video
source, the default value is
recommended here.
If you need to change the video
source, set this parameter to
Allow. After changing the video
source, reset this parameter to
Do not allow.
Face
tracking
Specifies whether the camera
automatically adjusts directions and
image sizes based on face recognition.
The default value is Allow.
Retain the default value so the
camera can automatically adjust
directions and image sizes based
on faces.
Name
Specifies the video input port name to
help you identify ports during a
conference.
Do not leave this parameter
blank.
Specifies the type of the camera
connected. The endpoint supports
cameras of multiple manufacturers and
models.
The default value is
VPC600/VPC620.
Specifies the serial port that is connected
to the camera control interface. You can
select either COM1 or COM2.
Select the serial port that is
being used. Otherwise, the
camera cannot be controlled.
Camera
type
Serial port
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Enter a string of 1 to 64
characters.
The control commands vary
with different cameras.
Therefore, select the camera
type correctly to ensure that the
camera can be controlled
properly.
75
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Parameter
Description
Setting
Moving
speed
Specifies the movement and zoom speed
for the camera at your site.
The default value is Medium.
Initial
position
Select Slow for accurate positioning.
Select Fast for quick positioning.
Select Medium for medium paced
positioning.
Specifies the position of the camera after
startup.
Auto: The camera moves to its initial
position after startup.
Preset 1: The camera moves to the
preset after startup.
The default value is Auto.
NOTE
Each camera preset stores the pan, tilt, and
zoom settings of the camera. For how to set
presets, see 5.3 Setting a Camera Preset.
Mirroring
Specifies whether the endpoint displays a
reflection of an input video, wherein the
right and left sides of the original are
reversed.
Normal: The input video will not be
reversed.
Horizontal mirroring: The endpoint
displays a reflection of the input
video, wherein the right and left sides
of the original are reversed like the
reflection of something seen in a
mirror.
The default value is Normal.
Input
source
Specifies the input source format.
The default value is Auto.
Stretch
mode
Specifies how your endpoint adjusts the
input video based on the video encoding
format.
The default value is No stretch.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Stretch: Stretch the video to full
screen with an unfixed aspect ratio.
No stretch: Stretch the video to full
screen with a fixed aspect ratio. Black
borders may appear at the upper and
lower part of the display.
Intelligent stretch: Crop the video to
an appropriate size and stretch the
video to full screen with the original
aspect ratio. For example, to change a
wide-screen video to a narrow-screen
video, your endpoint crops the left
and right edges of the wide-screen
video and stretches the video to till
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is recommended that you set
this parameter to Stretch.
76
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
the screen.
1080p PsF
conversion
When the camera connected to the
endpoint uses the Progressive segmented
Frame (PsF) mode for transmitting
signals, enable this function.
The default value is Disable.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.3.3 Setting the Multi-View Mode
With the multi-view function, you can view multiple local videos in Picture in Picture (PiP) or
split-screen mode on one display.
Background
Your endpoint is able to combine two or more local inputs and share them over one channel
with remote participants. The inputs can be videos captured by the camera or computer
desktops. You can set the inputs before or during a conference, and the settings take effect
immediately. The multi-view layout can be Picture in Picture (PiP), 2-pane, or 3-pane modes.
In PiP mode, the PiP window can be in the upper left, upper right, lower left, or lower right
corner. One input can be configured to show in one or more panes, but the input cannot be a
remote video source.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Multi-View tab.
Step 2 Set Multi-view mode for any of the following:
PiP
2 panes
3 panes
3 panes
Step 3 Specify input sources for the multi-view mode you selected.
Step 4 Choose Device Control > Device Control and click the Video Control tab.
Step 5 In the Video Input Source area, set Video Source to Multi-View.
The multi-view is displayed as the conference video at the local site. If you are in a
conference, the multi-view will be shared to remote sites.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
7.3.4 Understanding Video Output Capabilities
You must under the video output capabilities of the endpoint to correctly set video output
parameters.
The video output formats vary according to port types. The capabilities of video output ports
and recommended configurations are described in Table 7-9, Table 7-10, and Table 7-11.
Table 7-9 Specifications of video output ports on the TE40
Port Name on the
UI
Port
Numbe
r on
the
Rear
Panel
Type
Output
Format
Default Settings
After the Startup
1 MAIN OUT
HDMI
DVI and
HDMI
By default, this port
functions as the main
output port, GUI port,
and caption output port,
and is used to display
the remote controlled
UI, captions, and local
video. This port can also
be used to switch to the
combined picture.
2 HDMI OUT
HDMI
DVI and
HDMI
By default, this port
functions as the
auxiliary output port
and is used to display
the local video.
When the Dual-screen
function is enabled, this
port displays the local
or remote presentation if
a presentation source is
connected to this port
and displays Huawei
logo or local video if no
presentation source is
connected to this port.
3 VGA OUT
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
VGA
VGA and
YPbPr
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
By default, this port
displays the local video.
78
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Table 7-10 Specifications of video output ports on the TE50
Port Name on the
UI
Port
Numb
er on
the
Rear
Panel
Type
Output
Format
Default Settings
After the Startup
1 MAIN OUT
HDMI
DVI and
HDMI
By default, this port
functions as the main
output port, GUI port,
and caption output port,
and is used to display
the remote controlled
UI, captions, and local
video. This port can also
be used to switch to the
combined picture.
2 HDMI OUT
HDMI
DVI and
HDMI
By default, this port
functions as the
auxiliary output port and
is used to display the
local video.
When the Dual-screen
function is enabled, this
port displays the local or
remote presentation if a
presentation source is
connected to this port
and displays Huawei
logo or local video if no
presentation source is
connected to this port.
3 VGA OUT
VGA
VGA and
YPbPr
By default, this port
displays the local video.
4 3G-SDI OUT
BNC
SDI
By default, this port
displays the local video.
5 SD OUT
RCA
CVBS
By default, this port
displays the local video.
Table 7-11 Specifications of video output ports on the TE60
Port Name on the
UI
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Port
Numb
er on
the
Rear
Panel
Type
Output
Format
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Default Settings
After the Startup
79
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Port Name on the
UI
Port
Numb
er on
the
Rear
Panel
Type
Output
Format
Default Settings
After the Startup
1 MAIN OUT
DVI-I
DVI, VGA,
YPbPr, and
HDMI
By default, this port
functions as the main
output port, GUI port,
and caption output port,
and is used to display
the remote controlled
UI, captions, and local
video. This port can also
be used to switch to the
combined picture.
2 PC OUT
DVI-I
DVI, VGA,
YPbPr, and
HDMI
HDMI
DVI and
HDMI
By default, this port
functions as the
auxiliary output port and
is used to display the
local video.
When the Dual-screen
function is enabled, this
port displays the local or
remote presentation if a
presentation source is
connected to this port
and displays Huawei
logo or local video if no
presentation source is
connected to this port.
NOTE
If you select HDMI and
DVI as the output signal
source, these two ports
deliver the same video. If
you select another type of
signal source, only the
DVI-I port delivers
videos.
(DVI-I
port)
DVI-I
3 DVR OUT
HDMI
DVI and
HDMI
By default, this port
displays the local video.
4 3G-SDI OUT
BNC
SDI
By default, this port
displays the local video.
2 SD OUT
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
S-VIDEO
and CVBS
By default, this port
displays the local video.
Connect a display to this
port using a
DVI-S-Video/VGA/CV
BS cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
7.3.5 Configuring Video Output
After connecting video cables, set the video output parameters, such as output mode,
resolution, refresh rate, and stretch mode. This will enable your endpoint to deliver a superior
video experience.
Background
Video is clearer at a higher resolution. Select a video resolution that is supported by the
display connected to your endpoint.
Table 7-12, Table 7-13, and Table 7-14 lists the resolutions supported by the video output
ports in each output mode.
Table 7-12 Available video resolutions in each output mode of TE40
Output Mode
Video Resolution
1 MAIN OUT
DVI
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p
HDMI
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
2 HDMI OUT
DVI
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p
HDMI
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
3 VGA OUT
VGA
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p
YPbPr
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
Table 7-13 Available video resolutions in each output mode of TE50
Output Mode
Video Resolution
1 MAIN OUT
DVI
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p
HDMI
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
2 HDMI OUT
DVI
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Output Mode
Video Resolution
HDMI
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
7 System Settings
3 VGA OUT
VGA
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p
YPbPr
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
4 3G-SDI OUT
SDI
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
5 SD OUT
CVBS
NTSC and PAL
Table 7-14 Available video resolutions in each output mode of TE60
Output Mode
Video Resolution
1 MAIN OUT
VGA
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p
YPbPr
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
DVI
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p
HDMI
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
2 PC OUT
VGA
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, and 1080p
YPbPr
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
DVI
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p
HDMI
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
2 SD OUT
CVBS
NTSC and PAL
S-VIDEO
NTSC and PAL
3 DVR OUT
DVI
800 x 600 pixels, 1024 x 768 pixels, 1280 x 1024 pixels, UXGA (1600
x 1200), 1920 x 1200 pixels, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p
HDMI
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Output Mode
7 System Settings
Video Resolution
4 3G-SDI OUT
SDI
720p, 1080i, and 1080p
Video is smoother at a higher refresh rate. Select a video resolution that is supported by the
display connected to your endpoint. Table 7-15 lists the refresh rates available for each video
resolution.
Table 7-15 Available refresh rates for each resolution
Video Resolution
Refresh Rate (Hz)
NTSC
60
PAL
50
800 x 600 pixels
56, 60, 72, 75, or 85
1024 x 768 pixels
60, 70, 75, or 85
1280 x 1024 pixels
60, 75, or 85
UXGA (1600 x
1200)
60
1920 x 1200 pixels
60
720p
60, if the output mode is VGA
50 or 60, if the output mode is DVI, YPbPr, or HDMI
1080i
50 or 60
1080p
60, if the output mode is VGA
24, 25, 30, 50, or 60, if the output mode is DVI, YPbPr, or HDMI
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Input/Output and click the Video Output tab.
Step 2 Set the video output parameters listed in Table 7-16.
Table 7-16 Video output parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
GUI
Specifies the video output port for the
remote controlled UI.
The default value is 1 MAIN
OUT.
During a conference, you can configure
your endpoint to display video on one
display and the remote controlled UI on
another display by setting this parameter
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
to a value different from the value of
Main output interface.
Caption
output
Specifies the video output port for
captions.
The default value is 1 MAIN
OUT.
NOTE
This parameter takes effect only when the
caption type is set to T.140.
Main output
interface
Auxiliary
output port
Specifies the main output port.
When Dual-screen is set to Enable,
this port is used to display the local or
remote video.
When Dual-screen is set to Disable,
this port is used to display the local or
remote video, or local or remote
presentation.
Specifies the auxiliary output port for
preferentially displaying presentation.
Dual-screen
When Dual-screen is set to Enable,
this port is used to display the local or
remote presentation if a presentation
source is plugged in and is used to
display the local video or Huawei
logo if no presentation source is
plugged in.
The default value is 1 MAIN
OUT.
The default value of TE60 is 2
PC OUT.
The default value of TE40 or
TE50 is 2 HDMI OUT.
Do not set Main output
interface and Auxiliary output
port to the same output port.
When Dual-screen is set to Disable,
this port is used to display the local
video or presentation when the
endpoint is not used in a conference,
and is used to display the remote
video or presentation when the
endpoint is used in a conference.
Specifies whether the endpoint displays
the video and presentation on separate
displays.
If you set this parameter to Enable, you
can set Show Huawei logo.
The default value is Disable.
You can enable this function
only when your endpoint is
connected to two displays.
Show
Huawei logo
Specifies whether to show the Huawei
logo on the display connected to an
auxiliary port when the endpoint is not
used in a conference and does not have
any presentation source plugged in.
The default value is Enable.
Name
Specifies the output port name to help
you identify ports during a conference.
The default value for the 1
MAIN OUT port is 1
MAIN OUT.
The default value for the 2
PC OUT port (only TE60) is
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
2 PC OUT.
Output mode
Specifies the format for the video
received by the display.
The default value for the 2
HDMI OUT port (only
TE40 and TE50) is 2 HDMI
OUT.
The default value for the 3
VGA OUT port (only TE40
and TE50) is 3 VGA OUT.
The default value for the 3
DVR OUT port (only TE60)
is 3 DVR OUT.
The default value for the 4
3G-SDI OUT port (only
TE50 and TE60) is 4
3G-SDI OUT.
The default value for the 5
SD OUT port (only TE50)
is 5 SD OUT.
The default value for the 2
SD OUT port (only TE60)
is 2 SD OUT.
The default value for the 1
MAIN OUT port is:
Output modes vary according to video
output ports. For details, refer to Table
7-12, Table 7-13 and Table 7-14.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
−
DVI if the TE60 is used.
−
HDMI if the TE40 or
TE50 is used.
The default value for the 2
PC OUT port (only TE60) is
DVI.
The default value for the 2
HDMI OUT port (only
TE40 and TE50) is DVI.
The default value for the 2
SD OUT port (only TE60)
is CVBS.
The default value for the 3
VGA OUT port (only TE40
and TE50) is VGA.
The default value for the 3
DVR OUT port (only TE60)
is DVI.
The default value for the 4
3G-SDI OUT port (only
TE50 and TE60) is SDI.
The default value for the 5
SD OUT port (only TE50)
is CVBS.
85
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Video
resolution
Refresh rate
Stretch
mode
Automatic
layout mode
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Description
Specifies the resolution for each video
output port. The available options vary
depending on your settings of Output
mode. Table 7-12, Table 7-13 and Table
7-14 lists the resolutions supported by
the video output ports in each output
mode.
7 System Settings
Setting
The default value for the 2
SD OUT port (only TE60)
is CVBS.
The default value for the 5
SD OUT port (only TE50)
is NTSC.
The default value for the 2
SD OUT port (only TE60)
is NTSC.
The default value for other
ports is 1080p.
Specifies the video refresh rate. The
available options vary depending on your
settings of Video resolution. Table 7-15
lists the refresh rates available for each
video resolution.
The default value is 60Hz.
Specifies how to adjust the aspect ratio
to fit the video into the screen.
The default value is Stretch.
Stretch: The aspect ratio is
changeable.
No stretch: The aspect ratio is not
changeable.
Intelligent stretch: Your endpoint
crops the video to an appropriate size
and stretches the video to full screen
with the original aspect ratio. For
example, to change a wide-screen
video to a narrow-screen video, your
endpoint crops the left and right
edges of the wide-screen video and
stretches the video to till the screen.
Specifies how the main output port of
your endpoint displays the video and
presentation during a conference.
Full screen: When a presentation is
not being shared, your endpoint
displays the remote video in full
screen. When a presentation is being
shared, your endpoint displays the
presentation in full screen.
PiP: When a presentation is not being
shared, your endpoint displays the
local video and remote video in
Picture in Picture (PiP) mode. When
a presentation is being shared, your
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
NOTE
After setting Video resolution and
Refresh rate, adjust the sampling
phase if the image is blurry or has
a little jitter. For details, see 5.8
Setting Preferred Video
Parameters.
The default value is Full
screen.
86
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
endpoint displays the presentation
and video in PiP mode.
PoP: When a presentation is not
being shared, your endpoint displays
the local video and remote video in
Picture out Picture (PoP) mode.
When a presentation is being shared,
your endpoint displays the
presentation, remote video, and local
video in PoP mode.
User defined: Users define the
content to be displayed by the main
output port based on the imported
layout policy file.
Small
window
position
Specifies the position of the PiP window
on the screen.
Display
local video
Specifies the content to be display
through a port.
Display
remote video
You can select these three parameters for
all video output ports, except Main
output interface and Auxiliary output
port.
Display
presentation
Automatic
layout mode
This parameter is available only when
Automatic layout mode is set to PiP.
Specifies how the auxiliary output port
displays the video and presentation after
the endpoint joins a conference. This
parameter is available only when you
have imported the layout policy file
through the web interface and selected
Dual-screen.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
The default value is Lower
right corner.
Select or deselect these three
parameters based on your
needs.
The default value is Default.
Default: The content displayed by the
auxiliary output port depends on the
setting of Dual-screen.
−
When Dual-screen is set to
Enable, this port is used to
display the local or remote
presentation if a presentation
source is plugged in and is used to
display the local video or Huawei
logo if no presentation source is
plugged in.
−
When Dual-screen is set to
Disable, this port is used to
display the local video or
presentation when the endpoint is
not used in a conference, and is
used to display the remote video
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
or presentation when the endpoint
is used in a conference. In this
case, Automatic layout mode is
unavailable on the web interface.
User defined: Users define the
content to be displayed by the
auxiliary output port based on the
imported layout policy file.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.4 Configuring Audio
After connecting audio cables, set the audio parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Input/Output and click the Audio tab.
Step 2 Set the audio parameters listed in Table 7-17.
Table 7-17 Audio parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Switch
controls
Controls whether audio signals collected
by audio input devices, excluding the
microphone array, are transmitted to
your endpoint when you turn off the
microphone array.
The default value is All audio
inputs.
MIC array only: Your endpoint can
receive audio signals collected by
audio input devices, excluding the
microphone array, when you turn off
the microphone array.
All audio inputs: Your endpoint
cannot receive audio signals collected
by any audio input devices when you
turn off the microphone array.
To enable your endpoint to receive audio
signals again, do any of the following:
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Press the button on the microphone
array to turn it on.
Press the microphone button on the
remote control to turn on the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
microphone array only or all audio
input devices, depending on your
settings of Switch controls.
Wireless
MIC power
saving mode
On the endpoint web interface,
choose Device Control > Audio
Control and select the audio input
ports you want to enable.
On the remote controlled UI, choose
Advanced Settings > Settings >
Audio > Audio Input and select the
audio input ports you want to enable.
If you select this parameter, when the
endpoint sleeps, the wireless microphone
VPM220W also sleeps to save power.
The VPM220W cannot be woken up
when the endpoint is woken up. To wake
up the VPM220W, press the mute button
on it.
The default value is Enable.
If you do not select this parameter, when
the endpoint sleeps, the VPM220W also
sleeps to save power. In addition, the
VPM220W can be woken up when the
endpoint is woken up.
LINE OUT
mode
Specifies the LINE OUT mode.
Main output interface: The LINE
OUT port is used as the main audio
output port and delivers the audio of
remote sites.
Auxiliary output port: The LINE
OUT port is used as the auxiliary
audio output port and delivers the
audio at your site as well as the audio
at remote sites.
The default value is Main
output interface.
Secondary
dial tone
Enables or disables tone prompts for
secondary dials.
The default value is Disable.
Echo delay
Adjusts the echo delay to eliminate echos
caused by delay in audio output during
conferences.
The default value is 0.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
7.5 Specifying Conference Settings
Your endpoint is ready for videoconferencing with its default conference settings, but you can
customize the conference settings based on the site requirements.
7.5.1 Setting Audio and Video Protocols
Your endpoint supports multiple audio and video protocols. Select the protocols required for
call purposes.
Background
Using the audio or video protocol that you select, your endpoint negotiates the audio or video
capability with a remote endpoint to set up a call.
If you do not select any audio or video protocols on the Audio and video protocols tab, you
cannot set audio or video protocols while you are 7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference
Parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Conference and click the Audio and video protocols tab.
Step 2 Select audio and video protocols.
Select at least one audio protocol and one video protocol so that you can use your endpoint to place
audio calls or video calls.
Select RTV and H.264 UC when your endpoint interoperates with a Lync device.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.5.2 Setting General Conference Parameters
You can set the modes in which the endpoint places and answers calls. For example, you can
set the endpoint to automatically answer calls, enable the do not disturb function, or set the
multipoint call mode.
Background
General conference parameters apply to the following conferences:
Point-to-point conferences initiated by your site
Multipoint conferences initiated by your site
Conferences that your site joins by answering the call from a remote site
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Conference and click the Normal tab.
Step 2 Set the general conference parameters listed in Table 7-18.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Table 7-18 General conference parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Answer
Mode
Specifies how your endpoint handles
incoming calls.
The default value is Manual.
Mute local
audio for
answered
calls
Manual: Your endpoint prompts you
to handle a call when the call comes
in.
Answer call automatically: Your
endpoint automatically answers
incoming calls when not being used
in a conference.
Specifies whether the endpoint turns off
all sounds generated at your site when
your endpoint joins a conference. If you
enable this parameter, no remote site can
hear your site.
The default value is Disable.
This parameter is available only when
Answer Mode is set to Answer call
automatically.
Open do not
disturb right
Specifies whether the do-not-disturb
function is configurable on the remote
controlled UI.
The default value is Yes.
The do-not-disturb function blocks all
incoming calls.
Site called
during
startup
Call times
Specifies the site that your endpoint
automatically calls when it starts.
You can proceed to set Call times only
after you set this parameter.
Specifies the maximum number of
attempts your endpoint calls a specified
site after startup.
The default value is None.
The available options are
entries in the contacts list.
The default value is 1.
The maximum value is 10.
If you set this parameter to 0, your
endpoint does not call the specified site
after startup.
Default call
bandwidth
Specifies the default data transmission
rate for your endpoint.
The default value is 1920 kbps.
NOTE
If this parameter is set incorrectly, the video
quality will be affected or the call might even
fail to be set up.
Maximum
incoming
call
bandwidth
Specifies the maximum bandwidth
allowed for receiving calls. The
bandwidths used for placing and
receiving calls cannot exceed this
bandwidth.
The default value is 8 Mbps.
The settings cannot exceed the
bandwidth supported by the
endpoint license.
The settings of this bandwidth and the
settings of Default call bandwidth are
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
independent of each other.
HELPDESK
number
Specifies the help desk number, which is
used during emergencies.
Obtain this number from the
videoconferencing system
administrator.
PSTN call
Specifies whether to support calls from
PSTN sites.
The default value is Enable.
After you enable this parameter and the
endpoint connects to a PSTN network,
the endpoint can receive calls from
PSTN sites.
Call
parameter
configuratio
Specifies whether you can set the call
type and data transmission rate before
initiating point-to-point calls.
The default value is Disable.
Wi-Fi
network
preferred
Specifies whether to prioritize a Wi-Fi
network when both wireless and wired
networks are available.
The default value is Disable.
Multipoint
call mode
Specifies how your endpoint initiates a
multipoint conference.
The default value is AUTO.
Default
remote
layout
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
AUTO: The endpoint auto-selects the
initiation mode based on its system
settings and capabilities. The built-in
MCU is prioritized.
Multipoint converge: The endpoint
initiates a multipoint conference
using SiteCall with a standalone
MCU.
Built-in MCU: The endpoint initiates
a multipoint conference using its
built-in MCU. This function requires
the endpoint to have a built-in MCU.
In addition, you need to set Default
remote layout, Add presentation to
continuous presence, and Add local
video to continuous presence.
OFF: The endpoint allows for two
concurrent calls, which can be one
audio call and one video call, or two
audio-only calls. Selecting this option
does not affect the use of the SiteCall
function.
Specifies the default view displayed to
remote sites in a multipoint conference
initiated by the endpoint's built-in MCU.
If the view is in continuous presence, the
number of panes is determined by the
built-in MCU's capabilities and the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The default value is Voice
activated, in panes.
92
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
number of participant sites. The video
feeds for the continuous presence panes
are determined by the joining sequence
of participant sites and your settings of
this parameter.
Voice activated, full screen: The
remote sites view, in full screen, the
video of the site that generates the
loudest volume.
Voice activated, in panes: The
remote sites view continuous
presence, with the main pane
displaying the video of the site that
generates the loudest volume.
Bisect: The remote sites view, in
bisect mode, the videos of the other
participant sites. The site that
generates the louder volume is
highlighted. A presentation will not
be displayed in this layout.
Fixed site, full screen: The remote
sites view, in full screen, the video of
a specified site. To view a site in full
screen, click it in the site list.
Fixed sites, in panes: The remote
sites view continuous presence, with
the main pane displaying the video of
a specified site. To add a participant
site to the main pane, click it in the
site list.
NOTE
After you set this parameter, the local site
views other sites in full screen or continuous
presence mode, but cannot view itself.
Add
presentation
to
continuous
presence
Specifies whether the shared presentation The default value is Disable.
is displayed in continuous presence
during a multipoint conference initiated
by the endpoint's built-in MCU.
If the continuous presence layout is
Bisect, the presentation will not be
displayed in continuous presence.
NOTE
The settings of this parameter do not take
effect at H.323 sites where the endpoints in
V100R001C10 are used.
Add local
video to
continuous
presence
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Specifies whether a site's local video is
displayed in the site's continuous
presence view during a multipoint
conference initiated by the endpoint's
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The default value is Disable.
93
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
built-in MCU.
NOTE
The settings of this parameter do not take
effect at H.323 sites where the endpoints in
V100R001C10 are used.
Continuous
presence
pane display
mode
Voice
Switching
Sensitivity
Recording
server
address
Specifies the display mode for the panes
in continuous presence.
Stretch: The video in a pane has its
aspect ratio automatically adjusted so
it can fill the entire pane.
Tile: The video in a pane is repeated
until it can fill the entire pane.
Specifies the sensitivity for the voice
activation function used in multipoint
conferences.
High: Voice activation is performed
when the voice volume is low.
Medium: Voice activation is
performed when the voice volume is
moderate.
Low: Voice activation is performed
when the voice volume is high.
Specifies the IP address or URL of the
Recording & Streaming Engine (RSE).
The default value is Stretch.
The default value is High.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
If the endpoint has been registered with
an H.323 gatekeeper (GK), you can enter
the H.323 number or unified recording
number that the endpoint uses to register
with the GK.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.5.3 Setting Advanced Conference Parameters
Your endpoint allows you to configure advanced conference parameters before you initiate
single-stream or dual-stream conferences.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Conference and click the Advanced Settings tab.
Step 2 Set the advanced conference parameters listed in Table 7-19.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Table 7-19 Advanced conference parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Audio protocol
Specifies the audio protocol the
endpoint uses to encode audio.
The default value is Auto.
Audio channels
Specifies the audio channels.
The default value is Two.
This parameter is available only
when you select AAC_LD or
HWA-LD.
Video protocol
Specifies the video protocol the
endpoint uses to encode video.
During a non-multi-stream
conference, the video protocol is the
video protocol the endpoint uses at
your site.
Video resolution
Specifies the video format. The
available options vary depending on
your settings of Video protocol.
The default value is Auto.
To initiate an HD video
conference, select an H.264
HP-related video protocol.
The default value is Sharp.
When Video protocol is set to
Auto, set this parameter to either of
the following:
Video frame rate
Sharp: Your endpoint uses a
high video resolution to ensure
clear video.
Smooth: Your endpoint uses a
high frame rate to ensure smooth
video.
Specifies the frame rate used during
video encoding.
It is recommended that you
set this parameter to Auto.
When Video protocol is set to
Auto, this parameter is not
available.
Video at a higher frame rate is
smoother. Video at a lower frame
rate is clearer.
Prevent little packet
loss
Presentation
Specifies whether to prevent
sporadic packet loss to avoid
artifacts.
The default value is
Disable.
Specifies whether you can share
presentations during conferences.
The default value is Enable.
Select this parameter if all
endpoints are on the same
private network and
sporadic packet loss occurs.
NOTE
You can set Presentation protocol,
Presentation resolution, Presentation
mode, Presentation bandwidth
setting, Presentation bandwidth (%),
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
Presentation sharing mode, and
Presentation plug-and-share only after
you set this parameter to Enable.
Presentation
protocol
Specifies the video protocol your
endpoint uses to encode
presentations.
The default value is Auto.
Presentation
resolution
Specifies the presentation format.
The available options vary
depending on your settings of
Presentation protocol.
The default value is Sharp.
When Presentation protocol is set
to Auto, set this parameter to either
of the following:
Presentation mode
Smooth: Your endpoint uses a
high frame rate to ensure smooth
video.
Sharp: Your endpoint uses a
high video resolution to ensure
clear video.
Specifies the mode of the
presentation you want to share.
Presentation: When the video is
switched, the presentation
remains unchanged. Only one
site in the conference can share a
presentation one time.
Live: The presentation viewed
by each site is switched along
with the video. All sites in a
conference can share
presentations simultaneously.
The default value is
Presentation.
NOTE
When connected to an IMS network, the
endpoint cannot share a presentation in
Live mode.
Presentation
bandwidth setting
Presentation
bandwidth
Specifies the mode for setting the
presentation video bandwidth.
Auto: Your endpoint
automatically sets the
presentation video bandwidth
based on the bandwidth
available.
Manual: You must manually set
Presentation bandwidth (%).
Specifies the percentage of the call
bandwidth presentations can occupy.
The default value is Auto.
The default value is 50.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
This parameter is available only when
Presentation is set to Enable and
Presentation bandwidth setting is set
to Manual.
Presentation sharing
mode
Specifies the mode for sharing
presentations.
Auto: The endpoint
automatically shares
presentations along with videos.
This parameter can be set to
Auto only when Presentation
mode is set to Live.
Manual: You must manually
share presentations by using the
The default value is
Manual.
remote control
button or
through the web interface. For
details about how to share
presentations through the web
interface, see 4.7 Sharing a
Presentation.
Presentation
plug-and-share
Specifies whether your site
automatically shares presentations
with remote sites once presentation
input is detected.
The default value is
Disable.
Dynamic bandwidth
Specifies whether the endpoint
implements the following if the
packet loss rate increases due to
insufficient network bandwidth:
automatically decreases the
conference bandwidth until packet
loss does not occur constantly or the
conference bandwidth is decreased
to 64 kbit/s. If constant packet loss is
detected, the endpoint can
dynamically adjust bandwidth to
recover stable conference quality
within 1 minute.
The default value is
Disable.
Specifies the transmission
bandwidth for a conference.
The default value is
Normal.
Conference
bandwidth
When the network is
running within normal
parameters, select
Disable.
When the network is not
running within normal
parameters, select
Enable.
If your endpoint accesses an E1
network through an IP line, set this
parameter to Limited for better
video conference quality.
Conference line
type
Specifies the type of line used
during a conference.
The default value is Auto.
If you select Auto and your endpoint
has registered with a network
gatekeeper (GK), your endpoint
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
preferentially uses H.323 to initiate a
conference.
Preferred IP
protocol
Specifies the protocol that IP sites
preferentially use.
The default value is H.323.
When Line type is set to Auto for
IP sites, your endpoint uses this
protocol to call the IP sites.
reserved
presentation
bandwidth
Disable this parameter if your site is
not going to send or receive
presentations during a conference
and the Received value for
Presentation bandwidth [frame
rate] is not -.
The default value is Enable.
If this parameter is disabled, the
Received value for Presentation
bandwidth [frame rate] restores to
- when you rejoin the conference.
NOTE
To view the Presentation bandwidth
[frame rate] value, choose
Maintenance > System Status >
Conference.
Face detection
Specifies whether to perform HD
encoding and decoding to improve
face recognition video quality.
The default value is
Disable.
You can increase the video
sharpness by enabling this parameter
in low bandwidths.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.6 Specifying Network Settings
The endpoint can communicate with other devices properly only after network settings are
specified on the endpoint web interface based on the network deployment of the endpoint.
7.6.1 Setting IP Parameters
To use the endpoint on an IP network to implement video communication, correctly set IP
parameters, which include DNS server address, network interface mode, and gateway address.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the IP tab.
Step 2 Set the IP parameters listed in Table 7-20.
Table 7-20 IP parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Common Settings
Network
interface
mode
Hub network
port mode
Specifies the working mode for the
network ports on the endpoint.
The default value is Auto
detection.
Auto detection: When accessing the
network, the endpoint automatically
negotiates with a remote network
device to determine the optimal work
mode.
It is recommended that the
parameter value be set to the
same as the network port
working mode of the remote
network device.
10 Mbps and half duplex: The data
transmission rate is 10 Mbit/s, and
data cannot be sent and received at
the same time.
10 Mbps and full duplex: The data
transmission rate is 10 Mbit/s, and
data can be sent and received at the
same time.
NOTE
When you do not know the
network port working mode of a
remote network device, set this
parameter to Auto detection.
Otherwise, the endpoint may fail
to access the network.
100 Mbps and half duplex: The data
transmission rate is 100 Mbit/s, and
data cannot be sent and received at
the same time.
100 Mbps and full duplex: The data
transmission rate is 100 Mbit/s, and
data can be sent and received at the
same time.
1000Mbps and full duplex: The data
transmission rate is 1000 Mbit/s, and
data can be sent and received at the
same time.
Specifies whether the endpoint can
function as a hub in this mode, enabling
the devices connected to its two network
ports to communicate with each other.
The default value is Disable.
When the endpoint is connected to the
Internet, devices connected to the
network ports on the endpoint can also
access the Internet.
MTU
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Specifies the maximum transmission unit
(MTU) in bytes. If the MTU is too large,
the network transmission rate may be
slowed, resulting in packet transmission
failures. If the MTU is too small, the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The default value is 1500.
99
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
network transmission efficiency may
suffer.
Local IP address
PPPoE
Specifies whether the endpoint accesses
broadband networks using dial-up
connections.
The default value is Disable.
NOTE
If you set this parameter to Enable, you must
also set Dialing mode, User name, and
Password.
Dialing
mode
User name
Password
Connection
type
Local IP
address
Specifies the dial-up connection mode.
The dial-up process complies with the
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
(PPPoE) protocol. To use a dial-up
connection, in User name and
Password, enter the user name and
password that are provided by your
broadband access service provider.
Auto: When the endpoint starts, it
automatically sets up a dial-up
connection over the IP network. If the
dial-up service is not free of charge,
charging starts when the dial-up
connection is established.
Manual: The endpoint uses the
dial-up program to access the
network. For details about how to use
PPPoE for dial-up connections, see
5.9 Setting Up a PPPoE Dial-Up
Connection.
Specifies the mode in which the endpoint
obtains an IP address.
Static IP: The network administrator
assigns an IP address to the endpoint.
If you select this option, you must
also set Local IP address, Subnet
mask, and Gateway address.
Dynamic IP: When a DHCP server is
available on the network, the
endpoint automatically obtains an IP
address using the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
Specifies the endpoint IP address.
The default value of Dialing
mode is Auto.
The default value is Static IP.
The default value is
192.168.1.1
Examples:
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
IPv4: 192.168.1.10
IPv6:
100
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
fc00:0:0:0:200:55:26:1
Subnet mask
Specifies the subnet mask for the
endpoint IP address. A subnet mask
divides the IP address into a network
address and a host address.
The default value is
255.255.255.0
Gateway
address
Specifies the gateway address that
corresponds to the endpoint IP address.
Examples:
IPv4: 192.168.1.1
IPv6: fc00:0:0:0:200:55:0:1
IPv6
Specifies whether IPv6 is used. If you
use IPv6, you must also set Connection
type, Local IP address, Subnet prefix
length, and Gateway address.
The default value is Disable.
Subnet
prefix length
Specifies the prefix length for the IPv6
address of the endpoint.
The default value is 0. You
need to set this parameter only
when the IPv6 is enabled.
Alternate IP address
Alternate IP
address
Subnet mask
Specifies the alternate IP address of the
endpoint. This IP address cannot be in
the same network segment as Local IP
address (described in the Local IP
address section in this table) or the IP
address of the gatekeeper (GK) server.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
Specifies the mode for setting the DNS
server address.
The default value is Auto.
DNS
DNS address
type
DNS server
address 1
DNS server
address 2
DNS server
address 3
Auto: The endpoint automatically
obtains the DNS server address. If
you select this option, a DNS server
must be available on the network.
Manual: You must set DNS server
address 1, DNS server address 2, or
DNS server address 3.
Specifies the IP address of the active
Domain Name System (DNS) server.
After you set this parameter, domain
names can be used as the addresses of
network gatekeeper (GK) and Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) servers. The
DNS server will translate the domain
names into the IP addresses of the GK
and SIP servers.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
Specifies whether to enable 802.1x
authentication. If the network where your
The default value is Disable.
802.1x
802.1x
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
endpoint is deployed requires
authentication, set this parameter to
Enable.
NOTE
If you set this parameter to Enable, you must
also set Authentication mode.
Authenticati
on mode
Certificate
account
User name
Password
Specifies the authentication mode, which
can be certificate authentication or
password authentication.
Certificate: Use an imported
certificate and the set Certificate
account to initiate authentication to
the authentication server.
Password: Use the set user name and
password to initiate authentication to
the authentication server.
Specifies the ID that matches the
certificate imported for certificate
authentication.
Specify the user name and password for
network authentication.
The default value is Password.
NOTE
If you select Certificate, obtain
the certificate from the certificate
server administrator first. For
details about how to import a
certificate, see 7.8.1 Importing a
Certificate.
The default value is
administrator.
Obtain the values from the
authentication server
administrator.
The default value of User
name is admin.
Obtain the values from the
authentication server
administrator.
802.1p/q
802.1p/q
Specifies whether to enable 802.1p/q. If
the switch has a virtual LAN (VLAN)
set, enable 802.1p/q and set related
parameters so the endpoint can access
the switch and network interconnection
can be implemented.
The default value is Disable.
NOTE
The settings must be consistent
with those on the switch.
Otherwise, network
interconnection may fail.
NOTE
If you set this parameter to Enable, you must
also set VLAN ID and Priority.
VLAN ID
Specifies the ID of the VLAN to which
the endpoint needs to connect.
The default value is 1.
Value range: 1-4094
Obtain the ID from the network
administrator.
Priority
Specifies the priority of packets
forwarded by the switch.
The default value is 0.
Value range: 0-7
The priority increases with the value.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Step 3 Click Save.
Log in to the endpoint web interface using the new IP address.
----End
7.6.2 Setting H.323 Parameters
To prepare your endpoint for video communication using the H.323, set H.323 parameters
such as whether to use the network gatekeeper (GK).
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the H.323/SIP Settings tab.
Step 2 Set the H.323 parameters listed in Table 7-21.
Table 7-21 H.323 parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Enable GK
Specifies whether your endpoint uses a
GK.
The default value is Disable.
Enable: When your endpoint starts, it
registers with the specified GK. An
endpoint that registers with a GK can
place calls to remote sites using their
site numbers if the remote sites also
register with GKs.
Disable: Your endpoint does not
register with the GK. To call another
endpoint through H.323, your
endpoint can only use the called
endpoint's IP address.
It is recommended that you set
this parameter to Enable.
NOTE
If you select Enable, you must also set GK
registration mode, Site number, H.323 ID,
and Password.
GK
registration
mode
GK address
Specifies the mode for registering your
endpoint with a GK.
Auto: Your endpoint automatically
registers with an available GK on the
network and obtains the GK address.
Manual: You must set GK address,
which specifies the GK with which
you want your endpoint to register.
Specifies the IP address or domain name
of the server where the desired GK is
installed.
The default value is Auto.
It is recommended that you set
this parameter to Manual.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
If you set this parameter to the domain
name, you must enable the DNS server
and set correct mapping information on
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
the server.
E.164
Specifies the site number for your
endpoint.
Enter a string of 1 to 32 digits.
If your endpoint registers with a GK,
endpoints that also register with GKs can
dial this site number to call your
endpoint.
H.323 ID
Specifies the name by which a GK
identifies your endpoint after your
endpoint registers with the GK.
The name can consist of digits,
letters, and special characters,
such as @ # %.
For successful GK
authentication, the name
defined on your endpoint must
be consistent with the name
predefined on the GK.
Authenticati
on user
name
Password
Specifies the user name used for H.323
authentication.
This parameter is available only when
encryption is enabled. To enable
encryption, choose System Settings >
Security > Encryption, and set
Encryption to Enable.
Specifies the password your endpoint
uses to register with a GK. The GK uses
this password to authenticate your
endpoint.
The name can consist of digits,
letters, and special characters,
such as @ # %.
This user name must be the
same as the value of H.323 ID.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
For successful GK authentication, the
password defined on your endpoint must
be consistent with the password
predefined on the GK.
Use VoIP
gateway
VoIP
gateway
address
Huawei GK
Specifies whether your endpoint can
place calls to the endpoints connected to
the specified voice over IP (VoIP)
gateway. If you set this parameter to
Enable, you must also set VoIP
gateway address.
The default value is Disable.
Specifies whether your endpoint uses a
Huawei GK.
The default value is Enable.
If the Huawei GK is disabled, some
functions, such as Conference Control,
are unavailable on your endpoint.
HTTPS
mode
Specifies whether to upload SiteCall
conference information using HTTPS
encryption.
Disable this parameter if your
endpoint needs to interwork
with other manufacturers'
devices.
The default value is Enable.
If this parameter is set to disabled, your
endpoint will use the Transfer Control
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
Protocol (TCP) to upload SiteCall
conference information, which may be
insecure.
Multipoint
conference
authenticatio
Specifies whether to authenticate the
server during SiteCall.
The default value is Disable.
Step 3 Click Save.
----End
7.6.3 Setting SIP Parameters
To prepare your endpoint for video communication using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), set
and SIP parameters, such as whether to register the endpoint with a SIP server.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the H.323/SIP Settings tab.
Step 2 Set the SIP parameters listed in Table 7-22.
Table 7-22 SIP parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Register
with server
Specifies whether your endpoint registers
with a SIP server.
The default value is Disable.
Enable: An endpoint that registers
with a SIP server can place calls to
remote sites using their IP addresses
or site numbers if the remote sites
also register with SIP servers.
Disable: Your endpoint does not
register with the SIP server. To call
another endpoint through SIP, your
endpoint can only use the called
endpoint's IP address.
NOTE
If you set this parameter to Enable, you must
also set Server address, Conference service
number, Site number, User name, and
Password.
Server
address
Specifies the IP address or domain name
of the SIP server with which you want
your endpoint to register.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
If you set this parameter to the SIP server
domain name, enable the domain name
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
server (DNS). If the DNS is not enabled,
enable Proxy server.
Conference
service
number
Specifies the conference service number
for your endpoint to initiate conferences
over an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS)
network.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
Set this parameter to the conference
service number obtained from the
administrator of the IMS network.
Proxy server
Select this parameter when the network
environment requires the proxy server or
when Server address is set to the SIP
server domain name but the configured
DNS server fails to resolve this domain
name or the DNS server is not
configured.
The default value is Disable.
Set this parameter based on the
actual SIP network
environment.
NOTE
If you set this parameter to Enable, you must
also set Proxy server address, Site number,
User name, and Password.
Proxy server
address
Specifies the address of the proxy server.
If you set Server address to the SIP
server domain name, set this parameter
to the IP address bound to that domain
name.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
Site number
Specifies the site number for your
endpoint.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
If your endpoint registers with a SIP
server, endpoints that also register with
the SIP server can dial this site number
to call your endpoint.
Enter a value containing any of
the following: letters, digits,
special characters such as @
# %.
Specifies the user name for
authentication registration.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
User name
Obtain the value of this
parameter from the SIP server
administrator.
Password
Specifies the password that your
endpoint uses to register with a SIP
server.
For successful authentication on a SIP
server, this password set on your
endpoint must be the same as that set on
the SIP server.
Server type
Specifies the SIP server type.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
No default value is set for this
parameter.
Obtain the value of this
parameter from the SIP server
administrator.
The default value is Standard.
OCS: Select this option if your
endpoint registers with the Microsoft
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
Office Communications Server
(OCS) or Microsoft Lync Server.
Transmissio
n type
CISCO VCS: Select this option if
your endpoint registers with the Cisco
TelePresence Video Communication
Server (VCS).
Standard: Select this option if your
endpoint registers with other SIP
servers.
Specifies the protocol used for SIP
signaling transmission.
TCP: Use the Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) to implement
transmission reliability.
UDP: Use the User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) to implement
transmission with reduced latency.
TLS: Use Transport Layer Security
(TLS) to implement transmission
security. If you select this option, you
can import a root certificate when
your endpoint registers with a SIP
server. For details, see 7.8.1
Importing a Certificate. Note that
selecting this option may affect the
call rate. If you select this parameter,
you can set SSL version.
The default value is TLS.
To improve communication
security, select TLS.
SSL version
Specifies the encryption protocol used
for SIP calls, including TLS 1.0 and SSL
3.0.
The default value is TLS 1.0.
Video
request
handling
Specifies how your endpoint handles
video requests from a remote endpoint
during a point-to-point SIP audio call or
multipoint conference.
The default value is Manual.
Accept automatically: Your
endpoint automatically accepts video
requests from the remote endpoint.
Reject automatically: Your endpoint
automatically rejects video requests
from the remote endpoint.
Manual: Your endpoint prompts you
to accept video requests from the
remote endpoint.
Step 3 Click Save.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
7.6.4 Setting Wi-Fi Parameters
To use your endpoint to implement video communication over a Wi-Fi network, configure the
Wi-Fi settings.
Setting Wi-Fi Client Parameters
The endpoint can join a Wi-Fi network and hold video and audio conferences over the Wi-Fi
network only after Wi-Fi Client is enabled.
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Wi-Fi Settings tab.
Step 2 Set Wi-Fi Client to Enable.
Your endpoint automatically scans for available wireless routers and lists them in the Select
WLAN list box.
If you need to set a static IP address for your endpoint, go to Step 3. Otherwise, go to Step 5.
Step 3 Set Connection type, network mode parameters listed in Table 7-23.
Table 7-23 Network mode parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Connection type
Specifies the mode in which
the endpoint obtains an IP
address.
The default value is
Dynamic IP.
IP address
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Static IP: The network
administrator assigns an
IP address to the
endpoint. If you select
this option, you must
also set IP address,
Subnet mask, and
Gateway address.
Dynamic IP: The
endpoint automatically
obtains an IP address
over the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). If you select
this option, a DHCP
server must be available
on the network.
Specifies the IP address for
the endpoint to connect to a
WLAN access point to
implement communication.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Select Dynamic IP unless
special network
requirements are imposed.
No default value is set for
this parameter.
This IP address and the IP
address of the WLAN
access point must be on the
same network segment. For
example: if the IP address of
the WLAN access point is
192.168.1.100 and its subnet
mask is 255.255.255.0, you
108
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
7 System Settings
Description
Setting
must set Local IP address to
192.168.1.X. X can be any
integer ranging from 0 to
255 except 100.
Subnet mask
Specifies the subnet mask
for the endpoint IP address.
A subnet mask divides the
IP address into a network
address and a host address.
No default value is set for
this parameter.
Gateway address
Specifies the gateway
address that corresponds to
the endpoint IP address.
No default value is set for
this parameter.
Step 4 Click Save.
Step 5 Under Select WLAN, select the wireless router to connect to and click Connect.
If the wireless router you want to connect to is not listed, select Others, click Connect, and manually
add the router.
Step 6 When prompted, set the authentication parameters listed in Table 7-24.
Table 7-24 Authentication parameters
Parameter
Setting
Common authentication mode
Security Key or
Password
Set this parameter if the authentication mode of the connected
wireless router is set to WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, or WEP.
Obtain the value from the wireless router administrator.
802.1x authentication mode
EAP method
Consult the wireless router administrator about the detailed settings.
Phase 2
authentication
The authentication mode can be certificate authentication or
password authentication.
CA certificate
If certificate authentication is used, import a wireless certificate (with
the prefix of 802.1x) that matches the settings of Identity. For details
about how to import a certificate, see 7.8.1 Importing a Certificate.
User certificate
If password authentication is used, set Identity and Password.
Identity
Password
Step 7 Click OK.
When your endpoint is connected to the wireless router, the status of the router is connected.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
----End
Setting Wi-Fi Hotspot Parameters
When the Wi-Fi hotspot function is enabled on the endpoint, other devices, such as
VPM220Ws, tablets, and PCs, can access a Wi-Fi network by connecting to the endpoint.
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Wi-Fi Settings tab.
Step 2 Set Wi-Fi Hotspot to Enable.
Step 3 Set Settings, network hotspot parameters listed in Table 7-25.
Table 7-25 Wi-Fi hotspot parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
SSID
Number
Specifies the name of the Wi-Fi network
to which your endpoint connects.
The default values for the
TE40, TE50, and TE60 are
TE40_wifi_ap, TE50_wifi_ap,
and TE60_wifi_ap
respectively.
The value is a string of 1 to 32
characters, containing digits,
letters, and special characters,
such as @ # %.
Channel
Specifies the channel to transmit data
through Wi-Fi signals.
The default value is Auto.
Retain the default value.
If you select Auto, your endpoint
automatically selects the optimal
channel.
Identity
authenticatio
n mode
Encryption
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Specifies the identity authentication
mode used on the Wi-Fi network.
The default value is
WPA2-PSK.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) provides
greater security than Wired Equivalent
Privacy (WEP).
To ensure security, set this
parameter to WPA-PSK or
WPA2-PSK.
OPEN: When you select this option,
the values available for Encryption
mode are NONE and WEP.
SHARE: When you select this
option, the value available for
Encryption mode is WEP.
WPA-PSK: When you select this
option, the value available for
Encryption mode are TKIP and
AES.
WPA2-PSK: When you select this
option, the value available for
Encryption mode are TKIP and
AES.
Specifies the encryption method used on
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
NOTE
When the endpoint is connected to
a VPM220W, you must set
Identity authentication mode to
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK.
The default value is AES.
110
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Parameter
Description
Setting
mode
the Wi-Fi network. The required key
types vary depending on your settings for
this parameter. If you set Encryption
mode to NONE, the Wi-Fi network
provided by your endpoint is open to
everyone.
NOTE
When the endpoint is connected to
a VPM220W, you must set
Encryption mode to AES.
Password
Specifies the password required when
other devices connect to your endpoint.
Specifies the encryption
method used on the Wi-Fi
network. The required key
types vary depending on your
settings for this parameter. If
you set Encryption mode to
NONE, the Wi-Fi network
provided by your endpoint is
open to everyone.
IP address
Specify the IP address and subnet mask
of your endpoint.
Subnet mask
Enable
DHCP
server.
Start IP
address
Specifies whether your endpoint assigns
IP addresses to devices connected to it.
IP address: 192.168.2.1
Subnet mask:
255.255.255.0
This parameter is selected by
default.
NOTE
If you select this parameter, you must also set
Start IP address and End IP address.
Specify the IP address segment for
devices connected to your endpoint.
End IP
address
Enable
VPM220W
Examples:
Specifies whether the endpoint can
connect to the the VPM220W. Enable
this option when the endpoint connects
to the VPM220W.
Examples:
Start IP address:
192.168.2.10
End IP address:
192.168.2.100
This parameter is selected by
default.
Step 4 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately. You can then check the MAC address, and IP address of
the device connected to your endpoint.
----End
7.6.5 Setting SNMP Parameters
To enable the videoconferencing network management system to manage your endpoint,
configure the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) settings.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Background
Your endpoint communicates with and is remotely managed by the videoconferencing
network management system using SNMP. The videoconferencing network management
system implements the following:
Configures endpoint settings, including the H.323 and SIP.
Queries endpoint status.
Checks endpoint alarms.
Backs up and restores endpoint settings.
Upgrades the endpoint online.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the SNMP Settings tab.
Step 2 Set the SNMP parameters listed in Table 7-26.
Table 7-26 SNMP parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Enable
SNMP
Specifies whether the videoconferencing
network management system uses SNMP
to manage your endpoint.
The default value is Enable.
NOTE
If you set this parameter to Enable, you must
set other SNMP parameters.
Specifies whether to use SNMPv2. If
you set this parameter to Enable, you
must set Get community name, Set
community name, and Trap
community name.
The default value is Disable.
Get
community
name
Specifies the credential that the
videoconferencing network management
server uses to obtain endpoint settings.
The default value is
Change_Public.
Set
community
name
Specifies the credential that the
videoconferencing network management
server uses to specify endpoint settings.
The default value is
Change_Private.
Trap
community
Specifies the credential that the endpoint
uses to report alarms to the
The default value is
SNMPv2
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Using SNMPv2 may impose
security risks. Please set this
parameter with caution.
This parameter contains 6 to 32
characters. In addition, it must
include at least two of the
following: uppercase letter,
lowercase letter, digit, or
special character.
This parameter contains 6 to 32
characters. In addition, it must
include at least two of the
following: uppercase letter,
lowercase letter, digit, or
special character.
112
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Parameter
Description
Setting
name
videoconferencing network management
server.
Change_Me.
Trap server
address 1
Trap server
address 2
Trap server
address 3
Specify the IP address to which your
endpoint sends traps, namely, the IP
address of the computer where the
videoconferencing network management
system server is installed.
This parameter contains 6 to 32
characters. In addition, it must
include at least two of the
following: uppercase letter,
lowercase letter, digit, or
special character.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
You can leave this parameter
blank.
NOTE
A trap is an unrequested message that a
managed device (for example, an endpoint)
sends to a trap server (for example, the SMC)
to report urgent and important events.
Trap version
Version of the traps that the endpoint
sends to the videoconferencing network
management system through SNMP.
The default value is v3 trap.
Trap timeout
time
Specifies the timeout interval for traps,
in seconds.
The default value is 1.
This parameter is available only when
Trap version is set to v2 inform or v3
inform.
Trap retry
times
Specifies the number of retry attempts
for sending a trap.
The default value is 5.
This parameter is available only when
Trap version is set to v2 inform or v3
inform.
User name
Specifies the user name for sending
traps.
The default value is trapinit.
This parameter is available only when
Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3
inform.
Authenticati
on protocol
Authenticati
on password
Specify the authentication mode and
password that your endpoint uses to send
traps to the videoconferencing network
management system through SNMP.
This parameter is available only when
Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3
inform.
The default value of
Authentication protocol is
SHA.
Set Authentication password
to the password defined on the
videoconferencing network
management system.
If the two passwords are not the
same, authentication fails.
Encryption
protocol
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Specify the encryption protocol and
password that your endpoint uses to send
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The default value of
Encryption protocol is AES.
113
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Parameter
Description
Setting
Encryption
password
traps to the videoconferencing network
management system through SNMP.
Set Encryption password to a
string of 1 to 32 characters,
which contains letters, digits,
and special characters.
If you select No encryption for
Encryption protocol, traps are
transmitted using plaintext.
This parameter is available only when
Trap version is set to v3 trap or v3
inform.
SNMPv3 Authentication Information
User name
Specifies the user name for connecting
your endpoint to the videoconferencing
network management system through
SNMPv3.
The default value is v3user.
User rights
Specifies the user permissions of your
endpoint when it connects to the
videoconferencing network management
system.
The default value is Read and
write.
Authenticati
on protocol
Authenticati
on password
Encryption
protocol
Encryption
password
Read and write:read and write
Read only: read-only
Specify the authentication mode and
password for connecting the
videoconferencing network management
system to your endpoint.
Specify the encryption protocol and
password for connecting the
videoconferencing network management
system to your endpoint.
The default value of
Authentication protocol is
SHA.
When the videoconferencing
network management system
attempts to connect to your
endpoint, Authentication
protocol and New password
set on your endpoint are
required.
The default value of
Encryption protocol is AES.
Set Encryption password to a
string of 48 characters or less,
consisting of letters, digits, and
special characters.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.6.6 Setting Network Address Book Parameters
With correct network address book settings on your endpoint, you can download site
information from the network address book to your endpoint.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Background
The network address book stores address information of the sites in a videoconferencing
system. You can use any of the following methods to find the site you want to call:
Download the network address book from a File Transfer Protocol over SSL (FTPS)
server to the local address book. Then search the local address book for the site.
Search for the site on the directory server.
The directory server stores site information. The endpoint can access the directory server using the
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Network Address Book tab.
Step 2 Set the network address book parameters listed in Table 7-27.
Table 7-27 Network address book parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Network Address Book
Enable
network
address book
Specifies whether to enable the network
address book. If you set this parameter to
Enable, you must also set the rest of the
parameters described in this table.
The default value is Disable.
Mode
Specifies the mode for network address
book download.
The default value is Passive.
Synchronize
automaticall
Specifies whether your endpoint
automatically downloads records from
the network address book to the local
address book.
The default value is Disable.
FTPS
Specifies whether to use File Transfer
Protocol over SSL (FTPS) to encrypt
data through the Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) and ensure data integrity.
The default value is Enable.
Local
records
prevail if
duplicates
exist
Specifies whether records that already
exist in the local address book remain
unchanged during an address update
from the network address book.
The default value is Disable.
Prompt users
during
update
Specifies whether a message is displayed
to prompt you to update the local address
book if the versions of the network and
local address books are different. When
you confirm the update, site information
in the network address book is
downloaded to the local address book.
The default value is Enable.
Clear local
Specifies whether your endpoint
The default value is Disable.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Parameter
Description
records
during
update
automatically clears the local address
book when the local address book is
updated.
Server
address
Specifies the IP address of the server that
stores the network address book.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
File path
Specifies the save path of the network
address book on the server.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
User name
Specify the user name and password
your endpoint uses to get access to the
network address book.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
Server
address
Specifies the IP address of the LDAP
directory server.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
Port
Specifies the port for connecting to the
LDAP server.
The default value is 389.
Base DN
Specifies the distinguished name (DN) of
the entry at which a specified search
starts.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
Specifies the LDAP server authentication
mode.
The default value is General.
Password
Setting
LDAP Server
Authenticati
on type
General: Use the user name and
password for authentication.
Secured: Perform authentication,
including authentication on digital
certificates, based on the Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol. If you
select this option, you must also set
Domain name.
Anonymous: The LDAP server is
accessible to all users.
Example: dc=zdtest,dc=com
SSL
encryption
Specifies whether the SSL protocol is
used to encrypt data streams sent to and
received from the LDAP server.
The default value is Enable.
User name
Specifies the user name and password
used for LDAP server authentication.
The default value of User
name is admin.
Password
The value can consist of digits,
letters, and special characters,
such as @ # %.
Domain
name
Specifies the domain name used for
LDAP server authentication.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
This parameter is mandatory when
Authentication type is set to Secured.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Parameter
Description
Setting
Synchronize
automaticall
Specifies whether your endpoint
regularly updates the LDAP Address
Book entries in the local address book.
The default value is Enable.
NOTE
If you set this parameter to Enable, you must
also set Automatic update interval and
Local records prevail if duplicates exist.
Automatic
update
interval
Specifies the interval for updating the
LDAP Address Book entries in the local
address book.
The default value is 24 h.
Local
records
prevail if
duplicates
exist
Specifies whether records that already
exist in the local address book remain
unchanged during an address update
from the address book on the LDAP
server.
The default value is Disable.
Step 3 Click Save.
----End
7.6.7 Setting Firewall Parameters
Correct firewall settings ensure the security of the video conferences held using your
endpoint.
Background
With Network Address Translation (NAT) technology, a device on a local area network (LAN)
is allocated a dedicated internal IP address and uses an external IP address to communicate
with external devices. If your LAN uses NAT technology, set the IP address of the NAT wide
area network (WAN) on your endpoint.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Firewall tab.
Step 2 Set the firewall parameters listed in Table 7-28.
Table 7-28 Firewall parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
H.460
Specifies whether H.460 is enabled for
traversal between public and private
networks. If you set this parameter and
Use NAT to Enable, your endpoint will
use Huawei's proprietary Super Network
Passport (SNP). If you set this parameter
to Enable and your endpoint is
The default value is Enable.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
recognized as a private network
endpoint, H.460 will be used for
traversal between public and private
networks.
Use NAT
Specifies whether NAT is enabled for
traversal between public and private
networks. An endpoint installed on a
private network is considered as a public
network endpoint after NAT is enabled
on the endpoint. Even if you then enable
H.460 on the endpoint, it is still
considered as a public network endpoint,
and H.460 is not used.
The default value is Disable.
NAT
address
Specifies the public IP address for your
endpoint. This parameter is required after
you set Use NAT to Enable.
No default value is set for this
parameter.
SIP across
public and
private
networks
Specifies whether the endpoint supports
traversal between public and private
networks when deployed on a Simple
Internet Protocol (SIP) network.
The default value is Enable.
H.323 call
port
Specifies the port a remote site uses to
receive and send call signaling during
communication with your site.
The default value is 1720.
RAS source
port
Specifies the port your site uses to
receive and send Registration,
Admission and Status (RAS) signaling
during communication with remote sites.
RAS
destination
port
Specifies the port a remote site uses to
receive and send RAS signaling during
communication with your site.
SIP call port
Specifies the port your site uses to send
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
signaling during communication with
remote sites.
Value range: 1-65534.
Local listen
port
Specifies the local SIP listening port.
The default value is 5060.
Server listen
port
Specifies the listening port on the SIP
server with which your endpoint
registers.
SIP TLS call
port
Specifies the port your site uses to send
SIP signaling during communication
with remote sites when Transmission
type is set to TLS.
Local SIP
TLS listen
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Value range: 1-65534.
The default value is 1719.
Value range: 1-65534.
The default value is 1719.
Value range: 1-65534.
The default value is 5060.
Value range: 1-65534.
Specifies the local SIP listening port
when Transmission type is set to TLS.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The default value is 5060.
Value range: 1-65534.
The default value is 5061.
Value range: 1-65534.
NOTE
For details about how to set
Transmission type, see 7.6.3
Setting SIP Parameters.
118
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
port
SIP server
TLS listen
port
Specifies the listening port on the SIP
server with which your endpoint
registers when Transmission type is set
to TLS.
Port settings
Specifies the port use.
Audio port
Video port
Normal: The number of the port
currently in use cannot be changed.
Port convergence: The port numbers
used in H.323 converge. Specifically,
signals of different formats use the
same port number. This saves port
resources.
Same port send/receive: Your
endpoint sends and receives data
streams through the same port.
The default value is Same port
send/receive.
Specifies the port your site uses to
receive audio packets during
communication with remote sites.
The default value is 10002.
Specifies the port your site uses to
receive video packets during
communication with remote sites.
The default value is 10004.
Enter an even number ranging
from 1 to 65534.
Enter an even number ranging
from 1 to 65534.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.6.8 Setting Network Diagnostics Parameters
Correct settings on the ports used for diagnostics enable you to use a network diagnostics tool
to diagnose your endpoint using the ports.
Background
You can use a network diagnostics tool to diagnose your endpoint only when the endpoint is
not used in any conferences.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the Network diagnostics tab.
Step 2 Set the network diagnostics parameters listed in Table 7-29.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Table 7-29 Network diagnostics parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Network
diagnostics
Specifies whether to enable the
Registration, Admission and Status
(RAS) ports, H.323 call port, and
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) port to
be used for network diagnostics.
The default value is Disable.
H.323 call
port
Specifies the port the network
diagnostics tool uses to receive and send
call signaling during communication
with your endpoint.
The default value is 1820.
RAS source
port
Specifies the port your endpoint uses to
receive and send RAS signaling during
communication with the network
diagnostics tool.
The default value is 1819.
RAS
destination
port
Specifies the port the network
diagnostics tool uses to receive and send
RAS signaling during communication
with your endpoint.
The default value is 1819.
SIP call port
Specifies the port your endpoint uses to
send SIP signaling during
communication with the network
diagnostics tool.
The default value is 5160.
Diagnostics
tool user
name
Specify the user name and password the
network diagnostics tool uses for
authentication when attempting to
communicate with your endpoint.
The default value of
Diagnostics tool user name is
admin.
Specifies whether to perform the ping
operation after your endpoint exits a
conference. Ping results are recorded in a
log.
The default value is Enable.
Diagnostics
tool
password
Test network
after exiting
conference
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.6.9 Setting QoS Parameters
Quality of service (QoS) settings determine the mode for processing IP data packets during a
conference.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the QoS tab.
Step 2 Set the QoS parameters listed in Table 7-30.
Table 7-30 QoS parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
QoS type
Specifies the type of the Quality of Service
(QoS) network security measure used to
deal with the network latency, congestion,
and other issues.
The default value is
Priority.
Priority: If you select this option, you
must also set IP priority and Service
type.
DiffServ: If you select this option, you
must also set DSCP.
Specifies the priority that a network device
gives to forwarding the data packets sent
by your endpoint.
IP priority
The default value is 5.
Value range: 0-7
A larger value indicates a higher priority.
Specifies how the data packets sent and
received by your endpoint are processed on
the network.
Service type
Normal: Network devices transmit the
data packets without special processing.
Minimum delay: Data packets are
transmitted at the highest rate with the
minimum delay.
Maximum throughput: A large
amount of data packets can be
transmitted on the network.
Highest reliability: Data packets can
be transmitted to remote sites
completely and correctly.
Minimum cost: Network devices
transmit data packets of the same traffic
at lower costs.
Specify the service level of data packets
sent by your endpoint during transmission.
DSCP audio
DSCP video
DSCP data
DSCP signaling
Network jitter
The default value is 32.
Value range: 0-63
A larger value indicates a higher service
level.
Adjusts network jitter settings to address:
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
The default value is
Minimum delay.
Labial synchronization problems during
conferences
Choppy audio problems, by increasing
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The default value is
0ms.
Value range: 0 ms to
1000 ms
121
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Parameter
Description
7 System Settings
Setting
the network jitter value.
Fine-tunes network jitter settings if a slight
labial synchronization problem persists
after the network jitter settings are
adjusted.
Lip sync.
The default value is
0ms.
Value range: 0 ms to
300 ms
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.6.10 Connecting to a 4E1 Network
Only the endpoint supports 4E1 functions. To implement video communication over a
4E1-line dedicated network, you must connect the endpoint to the network.
Do not connect outdoor cables directly to the endpoint. If outdoor E1 lines (unbalanced)
are led indoors, surge protectors are required. Any questions, contact technical support
personnel.
The connection of E1 lines must comply with grounding specifications. For details, see A
E1 and T1 Grounding Criteria.
A 4E1 interface card provides four balanced-output ports. If the TE60 has a 4E1 interface card
installed, connect the endpoint to a 4E1-line dedicated network.
The ports of a 4E1 interface card can be used for any of the four E1 lines. There is no
mapping between the ports and the four E1 lines on the local and the remote ends, so the lines
can be connected to any of the ports at the local and remote ends, as long as all the four lines
are connected.
Inserting a 4E1 Interface Card
To hold conferences over a 4E1 network, you must insert a 4E1 interface card into the
corresponding interface slot at the back of the TE60.
For safety reasons, insert the interface card only when the TE60 is powered off.
Figure 7-1 shows the appearance of a 4E1 interface card, for your reference only.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Figure 7-1 4E1 interface card
1 Captive screw
2 4E1 port (RJ45)
3 Edge connector
To avoid damage to the interface card, implement antistatic measures before touching the card,
such as wearing an ESD wrist strap, as shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
Insert the interface card, as shown in Figure 7-3.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Figure 7-3 Inserting an interface card
Procedure
1.
Loosen the two screws and remove the cover panel of the interface card slot.
2.
Take out the interface card from its package. Slide the interface card into the card slot
while keeping the side with components facing upwards.
3.
Fasten the screws on the interface card.
Checking Status Indicators on the 4E1 Ports
The status indicators on the 4E1 ports can quickly provide information about the current
network connection.
There are two indicators on the 4E1 port to indicate the network connection, as shown in
Table 7-31.
Table 7-31 Status indicator on the 4E1 port
Indicator Status
Connection Status
The orange indicator is
on.
The lines are connected and the clocks on the lines are
synchronous.
The green indicator is
on.
A call can be placed.
Setting 4E1 Parameters
Only the TE60 supports 4E1 functions. If 4E1 lines are used for video communication, 4E1
parameters, such as the account, password, clock mode, signaling mode, and sensitivity, must
be set. You are allowed to set 4E1 parameters only after a 4E1 interface card is inserted into
the rear port on the TE60.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Network and click the 4E1/E1 tab.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Step 2 Set the 4E1 parameters listed in Table 7-32.
Table 7-32 4E1 parameters
Paramet
er
Description
Setting
Account
Passwor
These are the account and password
used by the endpoint when the
endpoint initiates an H.323
conference.
For detailed information of the
conference account and password,
contact the administrator of the
videoconferencing system.
Clock
mode
The following clock modes are
available:
If the endpoint is connected to an
MCU, set the MCU clock as the
master clock and the endpoint
clock as the slave clock.
If the endpoint is connected to
another endpoint, set the clock
mode of one endpoint to the
master clock and the clock mode
of the other endpoint to the slave
clock.
Specifies the transmission mode for
4E1 signaling.
To use channel associated
signaling, you can select CAS.
Cyclic redundancy checking (CRC) is
used to test the network condition.
The CRC result indicates the frame
error rate. When an option that
contains CRC4 is selected, the
endpoint tests the network for bit
errors.
To use common channel signaling,
you can select CCS.
Set this parameter based on the length
of the 4E1 line used between the
endpoint and the nearest network
node, such as a switch.
If the distance between the
endpoint and the nearest network
node is longer than 100 m, select
Long line.
If the distance between the
endpoint and the nearest network
node is shorter than 100 m, select
either Long line or Short line.
Long line is recommended.
Signalin
g mode
Sensitivi
ty
Preferred clock: If this option is
selected, the endpoint uses the
internal clock and provides the
clock to the remote device that is
connected to the E1 interface of
the endpoint. In a point-to-point
call, Clock mode for either
endpoint must be set to Preferred
clock.
Alternate clock 1, Alternate
clock 2, Alternate clock 3 and
Alternate clock 4: If one of these
options is selected, the endpoint
obtains the clock from a line.
Step 3 Click Save.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
7.6.11 Connecting to a PSTN Network
To implement voice communication over a public switched telephone network (PSTN), you
must connect the endpoint to the PSTN.
After being connected to the PSTN, the endpoint can place calls to PSTN phones.
To connect the endpoint to the PSTN, connect the PSTN port on the endpoint to the PSTN
port installed by the carrier through a phone cable. After that, the endpoint can be used as a
fixed-line phone while providing video conference functions.
The PSTN number of the endpoint is the fixed-line phone number assigned to the PSTN port
installed by the carrier.
The application scenarios of connecting the endpoint to the PSTN are as follows:
Use the endpoint as a fixed-line phone to place calls to mobile phones or other fixed-line
phones.
Invite a mobile phone or fixed-line phone user to a multipoint conference when the
endpoint is in the conference.
PSTN phones can place calls to the endpoint connected to the PSTN directly by dialing the
PSTN number of the endpoint.
By default, the endpoint allows for incoming PSTN calls. To view the related parameter
settings, log in to the endpoint web interface, and choose System Settings > Conference >
Normal.
By default, the endpoint has the PSTN audio input enabled. To view the setting of the PSTN
parameter, log in to the endpoint web interface, and choose Device Control > Device
Control > Audio Control > PSTN.
Gain adjustment: You can move the slider to adjust the volume of PSTN calls.
Sound mixing for PSTN sites: specifies whether all the sites (including PSTN sites, such
as mobile phones) in a multipoint conference can hear each other. Enable this option
when the endpoint joins a multipoint conference as a PSTN site.
The endpoint comes with a PSTN port, which can be used in China only.
7.7 Security
To improve communication security, you can encrypt conferences, set or change conference
passwords, and disable remote access to the endpoint.
7.7.1 Enabling Encryption
On an IP network, which is neither quality-guaranteed nor secure, encryption can be used to
increase video communication security.
Background
Encryption can be H.235 or SRTP encryption.
Both parties involved in communication must support encryption; otherwise, encryption fails.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Advanced > Set > Security > Encryption and select an encryption policy.
Step 2 Set Encryption parameters.
Disable: No stream is encrypted.
Enable: Stream encryption is mandatory. If you select this option, the endpoint can only
attend encrypted conferences. If a remote site is also encryption capable, an encrypted
conference is initiated upon successful call connection with the remote site. If the remote
site is encryption incapable, the call to the remote site fails.
Maximum interconnectivity: Media streams are encrypted only when a call is set up. If
you select this option for the local site, the conferences between the local and remote
sites are not encrypted only when Disable is selected for the remote sites.
Step 3 Choose Save.
----End
7.7.2 Supporting Remote Logins
You can specify whether remote users can log in to the endpoint to manage it using the
endpoint web interface, SSH, or Telnet.
Web-based Login
This operation can be performed only on the remote controlled UI.
Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Secured.
Step 2 Click the Web Login tab and select Web Login.
After Web Login is selected, remote users can log in to the endpoint web interface to set
parameters, start conferences, and view the endpoint status.
Step 3 Select Save.
----End
SSH and Telnet Login
Telnet is an insecure protocol. You are advised to use SSH login.
Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Secured > SSH/Telnet. Set the SSH and Telnet login
parameters described in Table 7-33.
Table 7-33 SSH and Telnet login parameters
Parameter
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Description
Setting
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Parameter
Description
Setting
Telnet Login
Specifies whether remote users can
log in to the endpoint in Telnet
mode for maintenance and
configuration purposes, such as
querying system logs and status
information.
This parameter is deselected by
default.
NOTICE
If the computer you use to telnet to
your endpoint runs Linux, specify the
Telnet port on the endpoint by running
telnet endpoint IP address port
number. For example, run telnet
10.11.12.123 23 where 23 is the port
number.
To protect against unauthorized
access, change the password at
your first login and regularly
change the password afterward.
Specifies whether to enable SSH,
which improves transmission
security and prevents information
disclosure.
This parameter is deselected by
default.
SSH
The default user name and
password for telnetting to the
endpoint are debug and
Change_Me respectively.
The default user name and
password for logging in to the
endpoint in SSH mode are debug
and Change_Me respectively.
To protect against unauthorized
access, change the password at
your first login and regularly
change the password afterward.
A maximum of three users is allowed to simultaneously log in to the endpoint in SSH mode.
A maximum of seven users is allowed to simultaneously log in to the endpoint in SSH and Telnet
modes.
Step 2 Select Save.
----End
7.7.3 Setting the Password of the Remote Control Administrator
To prevent endpoint parameter settings from being modified by unauthorized users, anyone
who wants to access the Settings screen and use the customized tool bar on the menu screen
must provide the password if the password is not set to blank.
Procedure
By default, the password of the remote control administrator is 12345678. To improve device
security, set a password at your first login and regularly change the password afterward.
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Secured.
Step 2 Click GUI tab. Set the password parameters described in Table 7-34.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Table 7-34 Setting the password of the remote control administrator
Parameter
Description
Setting
Encryption
advanced settings
Specifies whether to encrypt the
Advanced Settings screen of the
remote controlled UI.
This parameter is not
selected by default.
If this parameter is enabled, you must
enter the administrator password to
access the Advanced screen. If this
parameter is not selected, the
administrator password is required
only when you select Settings on the
Advanced screen.
Current password
Specifies the current password of the
remote control administrator.
New password
Specifies the new password of the
remote control administrator.
The password contains a
maximum of 32 characters.
Confirm
password
If you set this password to
blank, no password is
required when you access the
Settings screen and use the
customized tool bar on the
menu screen.
NOTE
You are advised to set a
complex password. A simple or
empty password results in high
security risks.
Step 3 Select Save.
----End
7.7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password
You can set the password required to upgrade the endpoint software using the upgrade tool.
The default upgrade password is Change_Me. To improve device security, set a password at
your first login and regularly change the password afterward. To change the password, choose
System Settings > Secured > Upgrade password and set Upgrade password.
The password contains 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the
following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character.
7.7.5 Setting the Air Content Sharing Password
When connecting to the endpoint, an air content sharing client must provide the predefined
password.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Background
For details about how to download and use an air content sharing client, see 4.7 Sharing a
Presentation.
Procedure
The default air content sharing password is Change_Me. To improve device security, set a
password at your first login and regularly change the password afterward. To change the
password, choose System Settings > Secured > Air Content Sharing and set Password.
The password contains 6 to 32 characters. In addition, it must include at least two of the
following: uppercase letter, lowercase letter, digit, or special character.
7.7.6 Setting Web Account Security
Properly keep the web interface administrator account to ensure the security of web-based
login.
Setting the Web Administrator Account
The default account name of the web interface administrator is admin, which can be modified
only on the remote controlled UI. To change the account name, choose Advanced Settings >
Settings > Secured > Web Login on the remote controlled UI of the endpoint and set
Administrator name.
The default password of the web interface administrator is Change_Me. To improve device
security, set a password at your first login and regularly change the password afterward. On
the web page of the endpoint, choose System Settings > General > Personal and set the
administrator password, as shown in Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4 Setting the administrator password
Setting Web Login Security
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Secured.
Step 2 Click Web Login tab, set the Web login parameters listed in Table 7-35.
Table 7-35 Web login parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Maximum login
Specifies the maximum number of attempts
The value can be 3, 5, or
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Parameter
Description
Setting
attempts
that you can enter incorrect passwords for
any endpoint account or incorrect
authentication passwords for connecting to
the endpoint. When this number is reached,
the endpoint automatically locks the
account.
10.
Specifies the duration an endpoint account
will be locked. You can attempt to log in
again only when this duration ends.
The duration can be 5,
10, 15, 20, 30, or 60
minutes.
The default value is 5
min.
To ensure data transmission security, the
endpoint uses HTTPS to access its web
pages by default.
The default value is
Disable.
Lock time
HTTP
The default value is 5.
If a third-party interface uses HTTP to
access the endpoint, set this parameter to
Enable; otherwise, the interface cannot
access the endpoint.
Wake Up the
Endpoint
Specifies whether an endpoint can be
waked up on its web interface. If you select
this parameter, you can access the web
interface of an endpoint to wake up the
endpoint when it is in sleep mode.
The default value is
Enable.
Step 3 Click the Overtime tab and set Enable overtime.
Specifies the allowed idle time, exceeding which the current user will be automatically logged
out. The default value is 1 h. If you set this parameter to Disable, the endpoint will not log out
users automatically.
Step 4 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
7.7.7 Setting Whitelist
After you configure a whitelist, only devices with the IP addresses specified in the whitelist
can connect to the endpoint. If the whitelist is empty, all IP addresses are allowed to connect
to the endpoint. The whitelist helps enhance videoconferencing security.
Background
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Set the whitelist under the guidance of technical support engineers.
The endpoint whitelist is empty by default. That is, all IP addresses are allowed to connect to
the endpoint. If an endpoint is deployed in a public network, it is recommended that you add
commonly used IP addresses and IP address segments to the whitelist to decrease network
attack risks. You must add the IP addresses of the following devices to the whitelist:
PC that is used to access the endpoint web interface
Videoconferencing MCU
SMC
Recording server
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Whitelist.
Step 2 Select Enable.
If Enable is deselected, the whitelist is invalid. That is, all IP addresses are allowed to connect
to the endpoint. You can modify the whitelist only after selecting Enable here.
Step 3 Click Add and set IP address and Mask length.
Step 4 Click OK. The settings take effect immediately.
To delete a record from the whitelist, select the record and click Delete.
----End
7.8 Importing Security Certificates
Import certificates on the endpoint web interface to improve the communication security.
7.8.1 Importing a Certificate
You can import client, server, and SiteCall and 802.1x authentication certificates into your
endpoint. These certificates can be used to identify users, certificate authorities, and servers to
improve communication security. For example, a client certificate is required when your
endpoint registers with the SIP server using the Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol.
Prerequisites
Before importing a certificate, make sure it is issued by a security authority to prevent
security risks.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Client certificate: You have obtained the required certificate from the SIP server
administrator or downloaded it from a certificate authority.
Server certificate: You have downloaded the required certificate from a certificate
authority.
Multipoint conference certificate: You have obtained the required certificate from the
GK server administrator.
802.1x authentication certificate: You have obtained the required certificates from the
network administrator.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Import Certificate.
The Import Certificate dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Select File to select the certificate you want to import.
Step 4 Select the desired certificate type.
To import a certificate for authentication calls and when the endpointfunctions as the server, select
Server certificate.
To import a certificate for authentication registration or calls and when the endpoint functions as a
client (for example, TLS-based registration), select Client certificate.
To import a certificate used for SiteCall security, select Multipoint conference certificate.
To import certificates used for 802.1x wired or wireless network authentication, select the desired
certificates. When selecting the certificate type, choose the network type, which is Wireless and
wired by default.
Step 5 Click Import.
Step 6 Click Return when OK is displayed.
----End
7.8.2 Importing Web Certificates
To help ensure communication security, import web certificates, including the trusted
Certificate Authority (CA) file, local certificate file, local private key file, and local private
key password file, to the endpoint through the endpoint web interface.
Background
Professional guidance is required for importing certificates. Make sure the certificate to be
imported matches the certificate type selected; otherwise, the endpoint may malfunction.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Import Web Certificate.
The Import Web Certificate dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click
Step 4 Click
and select a certificate type.
, select the certificate you want to import, and click Import.
Step 5 Click Return when OK is displayed.
----End
7.8.3 Updating Web Certificates
After you import web certificates to the endpoint, update them to enable them to take effect.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Update Web Certificates.
Step 3 Click OK.
The endpoint restarts.
----End
7.9 Managing System Files
Manage system files on the endpoint interface to improve the operation and maintenance
(O%amp;M) efficiency of the endpoint.
7.9.1 Importing and Exporting Settings
You can import or export settings on the endpoint web interface. After your endpoint is
restored to its default settings, you can import previously exported settings.
Background
After your endpoint is restored to its default settings upon a fault, you can import previously
exported settings.
For example, when your endpoint is faulty and needs to be restored to its default settings,
export the existing settings before the restoration. After you restore your endpoint, directly
import the exported settings instead of manually setting the parameters. This saves your time.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Import/Export Settings.
The Import/Export Settings page is displayed.
Step 3 Perform either of the following:
To import system settings, click Import Settings.
To export system settings, click Export Settings.
The web administrator password is required when you import the configuration file. After the
configuration file is imported successfully, the endpoint automatically restarts for the
configuration file to take effect.
----End
7.9.2 Backing Up Settings
The administrator can use the One-Click Backup function to create a configuration backup
file for your endpoint. If some parameter settings under System Settings are inadvertently
deleted or changed, you can use this backup file to restore all settings under System Settings
to the pre-backup settings.
Background
If a configuration backup file is already stored on your endpoint, a new configuration backup
file will replace the original one.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click One-Click Backup.
Step 3 On the One-Click Backup page, click Back Up Settings.
Your endpoint then starts to create a configuration backup file. When the backup is complete,
a notification message is displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
To restore all settings under System Settings to the pre-backup settings, click Restore
Backup Settings. Your endpoint will then restart and restore the settings.
7.9.3 Importing License Files
Some functions on your endpoint, such as Wi-Fi and built-in MCU, require license files.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Prerequisites
You have obtained the latest license files.
From http://enterprise.huawei.com, you can use your contract number and device serial number to
download license files.
Background
Your endpoint can start properly even when no license file is loaded on it or the existing
license file has expired. After startup, you can load a valid license file, set parameters, and
upgrade software.
When a license file is updated, the original license file expires. For example, after you
purchase an official license, the trial license will expire.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Import License.
The Import License dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Select File, select the license file you want to import and click Import.
Step 4 Click Return when OK is displayed.
----End
7.9.4 Importing a Layout Policy File
After a layout policy file is imported to the endpoint, you can set the layout configured in that
file during a multipoint conference hosted by the endpoint's built-in MCU or chaired by your
site.
Prerequisites
A layout policy file has been exported using the layout customization tool.
You can obtain the layout customization tool from the software package for the endpoint.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Import Layout Policy File.
The Import Layout Policy File dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
, select the layout policy file you want to import, and click Import.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
7 System Settings
Step 4 Click Return when OK is displayed.
----End
7.9.5 Creating and Downloading a CSR File
You can create and export a CSR file from the endpoint web interface.
Prerequisites
The local private key password file has been imported.
Background
You can send the CSR file to a certification organization to generate an authentication
certificate for your endpoint.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Export CSR File.
Step 3 Enter the CSR file information and click OK.
The created CSR file will be stored on the endpoint.
Step 4 Click Download the CSR file to save the CSR file to the local computer.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
8 Upgrading
Upgrading
About This Chapter
Your endpoint supports the following software upgrade methods: automatic, using upgrade
tools, using the mini system, and from the endpoint web interface.
During the upgrade, do not power off the endpoint to prevent irreversible faults.
The differences between the four upgrade methods as follows:
Automatic upgrade
With the automatic upgrade function enabled and automatic upgrade parameters set, your
endpoint obtains upgrade files from the specified server and installs the upgrade files
when the preset upgrade interval arrives. For details, see 8.1 Automatic Upgrade.
Tool upgrade
Download the upgrade software to a computer, connect the computer to the endpoint
directly or over the LAN, and upgrade the endpoint. For details, see 8.2 Tool Upgrade.
Upgrade using the mini system
If upgrading the endpoint using its normal system fails due to a power failure or other
causes, you can use the mini system to complete the upgrade. For details, see 8.3
Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Mini System.
Upgrade from the endpoint web interface
On the endpoint web interface, manually upgrade the endpoint or set it to upgrade
automatically. For details, see 8.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface.
Before the upgrade, complete the following:
Read the Release Notes to understand the contents to be upgraded and precautions
required to be taken during the upgrade.
Obtain the current software version.
Back up the settings on the endpoint, such as the communication settings and address
book.
8.1 Automatic Upgrade
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
8 Upgrading
You can update your endpoint's software from the web interface. With the automatic upgrade
function enabled and automatic upgrade parameters set, your endpoint obtains upgrade files
from the specified server and installs the upgrade files when the preset upgrade interval
arrives.
8.2 Tool Upgrade
You can use a computer to locally upgrade the endpoint.
8.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Mini System
If upgrading the endpoint using its normal system fails, you can use the mini system to
complete the upgrade.
8.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface
You can update the endpoint software from the web interface.
8.1 Automatic Upgrade
You can update your endpoint's software from the web interface. With the automatic upgrade
function enabled and automatic upgrade parameters set, your endpoint obtains upgrade files
from the specified server and installs the upgrade files when the preset upgrade interval
arrives.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Auto Upgrade Settings.
The Auto Upgrade Settings page is displayed.
Step 3 Set the upgrade parameters listed in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Upgrade parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Auto
upgrade
Specifies whether the automatic upgrade
function is enabled. If you set this
parameter to Enable, you must also set
Upgrade interval, Server address,
User name, and Password. Your
endpoint will obtain upgrade files from
the specified server and install the files
when the specified upgrade interval is
reached.
This parameter is deselected by
default.
Enable
wireless
MIC auto
update
Specifies whether to automatically
update an upgradable wireless
microphone VPM220W after it is
connected to the endpoint.
This parameter is selected by
default.
Upgrade
Specifies the upgrade interval. This
The default value is 0.5 h.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
8 Upgrading
Parameter
Description
Setting
interval
parameter is available only when Auto
upgrade is selected.
Value range: 0.5 h to 24 h
Server
address
Specifies the IP address of the server that
stores the upgrade files for your
endpoint.
This parameter cannot be left
blank.
User name
Specify the user name and password
your endpoint uses to access the server.
No default value is set for these
parameters.
Password
Step 4 Perform either of the following:
If you selected Auto upgrade, click Save.
Click Manual upgrade.
----End
8.2 Tool Upgrade
You can use a computer to locally upgrade the endpoint.
Prerequisites
Before the upgrade, ensure that:
The target software is saved to the computer.
The computer is connected to the endpoint using a straight-through cable, crossover
cable, or switch.
You have obtained the upgrade password. The default upgrade password is Change_Me.
For details, see 7.7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password.
Upgrading a Single endpoint
Step 1 Power on the computer and endpoint.
Step 2 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer.
Step 3 Run UpgMaster.exe to display the window shown in Figure 8-1.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
8 Upgrading
Figure 8-1 Upgrading a single endpoint
Step 4 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file.
By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File.
Step 5 In Remote Terminal IP Address, enter the endpoint IP address, such as 10.10.10.10.
If Reboot is selected, the endpoint automatically restarts after the upgrade.
Step 6 Click Upgrade.
Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, enter the upgrade password and click OK.
----End
Upgrading Multiple Endpoints in Batches
Step 1 Power on the computer and endpoint.
Step 2 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer.
Step 3 Run UpgMaster.exe to display the window shown in Figure 8-1.
Step 4 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file.
By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File.
Step 5 Click
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
shown in Figure 8-1 to display the window as shown in Figure 8-2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
8 Upgrading
Figure 8-2 Upgrading multiple endpoints in batches
Step 6 In area 1 shown in Figure 8-2, enter the number of the endpoints you want to upgrade, for
example, 4.
Step 7 In area 3 shown in Figure 8-2, enter the IP addresses of the endpoints you want to upgrade.
Step 8 In area 4 shown in Figure 8-2, enter the upgrade passwords of the endpoints you want to
upgrade.
Step 9 In area 2 shown in Figure 8-2, select the endpoints you want to upgrade and click Upgrade.
To improve upgrade efficiency when the network bandwidth is insufficient, you can press Ctrl+ALT+C
in the window shown in Figure 8-1, and then set the upgrade policy in the displayed window.
----End
Upgrading Specified Software Modules
Step 1 Power on the computer and endpoint.
Step 2 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer.
Step 3 Run UpgMaster.exe to display the window shown in Figure 8-1.
Step 4 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file.
By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File.
Step 5 Press Ctrl+ALT+P to display the Pack Upgrade File window.
Step 6 In the upgrade file list area, select the software modules you want to upgrade.
Step 7 Click Pack File to pack the selected software modules into a .dat file. Save the file to the
computer, for example, save the file as tepart.dat to the computer.
Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, click OK.
Step 9 (Optional) In the window shown in Figure 8-1, click Browser and select the tepart.dat file
you saved in Step 7.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
8 Upgrading
The path displayed in Upgrade File automatically changes to the path of the tepart.dat file.
Step 10 In Remote Terminal IP Address, enter the endpoint IP address, such as 10.10.10.10.
Step 11 Click Upgrade.
Step 12 In the displayed dialog box, enter the upgrade password and click OK.
----End
8.3 Upgrading the Endpoint Using the Mini System
If upgrading the endpoint using its normal system fails, you can use the mini system to
complete the upgrade.
Prerequisites
A copy of the target software is available on the computer.
The computer is connected to the endpoint directly or over a LAN.
You have obtained the upgrade password. The default upgrade password is Change_Me.
For details, see 7.7.4 Setting the Upgrade Password.
Background
The mini system is used for upgrades when the endpoint software malfunctions. This method
can be repeatedly used and ensures successful software upgrades provided that there are no
hardware failures.
Procedure
Step 1 While the endpoint is restarting or powering on, press and hold the RESET button for 10
seconds.
The endpoint enters the mini system.
At this time, the endpoint has two IP addresses available: the static IP address of the normal system and
the default IP address (192.168.1.1). If the normal system IP address cannot be used for connection setup
or the endpoint fails to obtain any IP address because of the dynamic IP address or other causes, you can
use the default IP address for upgrades.
Step 2 Use Telnet to log in to the endpoint. Run the mnt upgswitch on command to enable the mini
system upgrade function.
The mini system upgrade function is disabled by default.
The default administrator user name and password for telnetting to the endpoint are debug and
Change_Me respectively.
Step 3 Extract the compressed software upgrade package on the computer.
Step 4 Run the upgrade program UpgradeTool.exe.
The upgrade dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 (Optional) Click Browser and select the te.dat file.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
8 Upgrading
By default, the path of the te.dat file is displayed in Upgrade File.
Step 6 In Remote Terminal IP Address, enter your endpoint IP address, for example, 192.168.1.1.
Then click Upgrade.
Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, click OK to start the upgrade.
Step 8 Restart the endpoint.
----End
8.4 Upgrading the Endpoint on Its Web Interface
You can update the endpoint software from the web interface.
Prerequisites
The upgrade file has been copied to your computer.
Do not close the endpoint web interface during the upgrade as doing so causes an upgrade
failure.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the endpoint web interface. Choose Maintenance > Upgrade.
The Upgrade dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click Select File and select the te.dat file on your computer.
Step 3 Click Import.
The endpoint starts the upgrade.
----End
The endpoint automatically restarts when the upgrade is complete.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
9 Maintenance
Maintenance
About This Chapter
You must periodically check the working environment, cable connection, communication
network connection, and audio-visual input and output of your endpoint. This ensures that the
endpoint and its peripheral equipment work properly.
9.1 Checking the Working Environment Periodically
To ensure that your endpoint can function properly, check the working environment
periodically.
9.2 Managing Common Users and Passwords
Properly keep the accounts of common web interface users. After logging in to the web
interface, a common user can configure only personal settings.
9.3 Customizing the Web Interface
On the endpoint, you can customize the shortcut bar and desktop icons to be displayed on the
web interface.
9.4 Customizing the Remote Controlled UI
You can customize the menu option bar, conference control functions, and status icons.
9.5 Checking the Endpoint Periodically
For preventive maintenance purposes, you need to check the audio, video, and communication
cables periodically.
9.6 Viewing System Status
System status information helps you maintain your endpoint.
9.7 Querying System Information
System information helps you maintain your endpoint.
9.8 Querying Logs
Logs record, in real time, all important events that occur when your endpoint runs. These
records assist you in maintaining your endpoint and locating system faults.
9.9 Restoring Your Endpoint to Default Settings
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
9 Maintenance
You can use the Restore Default function to restore your endpoint to its default settings.
9.1 Checking the Working Environment Periodically
To ensure that your endpoint can function properly, check the working environment
periodically.
Table 9-1 lists the items to be checked.
If any of the items does meet the requirements, power off the endpoint and take measures to
improve the environment. Ensure that the endpoint is used only when all the listed items meet
the requirements.
Table 9-1 Checking the working environment
Item
Requirement
Operating temperature
0°C to 40°C
Operating humidity
10% to 80% RH
9.2 Managing Common Users and Passwords
Properly keep the accounts of common web interface users. After logging in to the web
interface, a common user can configure only personal settings.
Step 1 Choose System Settings > General on the endpoint web interface.
The General page is displayed.
Step 2 Click the Personal tab and set the parameters described in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2 Setting the accounts of common web interface users
Parameter
Description
Setting
Name of user 1
Specify common users' user
name and password.
The user name can contain a
maximum of 64 characters,
and the password can
contain 6 to 32 characters.
Name of user 2
Password of user 1
Password of user 2
This type of user can
configure personal but not
system settings.
Confirm password
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The password must include
at least two of the following:
uppercase letter, lowercase
letter, digit, or special
character.
146
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
9 Maintenance
Parameter
Description
Setting
Name of API user
Specify the user name and
password for authenticating
the touch panel when it
attempts to connect to your
endpoint or authenticating
the Service Management
Center (SMC) when it
attempts to add your
endpoint as manageable
participant.
The default value of User
name is api.
The default value of User
password is
Change_Me.
Password of API user
Confirm password
The user name can contain a
maximum of 64 characters,
and the password can
contain 6 to 32 characters.
The password must include
at least two of the following:
uppercase letter, lowercase
letter, digit, or special
character.
Step 3 Click Save.
The settings take effect immediately.
----End
9.3 Customizing the Web Interface
On the endpoint, you can customize the shortcut bar and desktop icons to be displayed on the
web interface.
Background
Figure 9-1 shows the shortcut bar and desktop icons.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
9 Maintenance
Figure 9-1 Shortcut bar and desktop icons
(1) Shortcut bar
(2) Desktop icons
Procedure
Step 1 On the endpoint web interface, choose System Settings > Display and click the User defined
tab.
Step 2 Perform any of the following operations:
To customize desktop icons, click Desktop Icons and select the icons you want to
display on the desktop.
To customize the shortcut bar, click Shortcut Bar Icons and select the icons you want to
display in the shortcut bar. A maximum of 10 icons can be displayed on the shortcut bar.
To restore the web interface to its default style, click Restore Initial Style.
Step 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete your settings.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
9 Maintenance
----End
9.4 Customizing the Remote Controlled UI
You can customize the menu option bar, conference control functions, and status icons.
9.4.1 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons
You can customize which status icons are displayed on the home screen, helping you quickly
understand the endpoint's status.
For details about common status icons, see D Status Icons.
Choose System Settings > Display, click the Icon tab, and customize status icons.
Packet Loss Rate Icon
By comparing the packet loss rate on the current network with threshold A and threshold B,
the endpoint determines whether to display the packet loss rate icon on the remote controlled
UI. The policy is as follows:
Threshold A must be less than threshold B. Their value ranges are 0.1% to 100%. The default values for
threshold A and threshold B are 1% and 5%, respectively.
If the packet loss rate is less than or equal to threshold A, no packet loss rate icon is
displayed.
If the packet loss rate is between threshold A and threshold B,
If the packet loss rate is greater than or equal to threshold B,
is displayed.
is displayed.
When Serious packet loss notice is enabled, the remote controlled UI displays a text alert if
the packet loss rate is greater than threshold B for 5 seconds or more.
Other Icons
A status icon is displayed on screens if the following conditions are met:
The status icon to be displayed on screens is selected.
The function or the condition that corresponds to the status icon has been enabled.
9.4.2 Customizing the Home Screen
You can customize the home screen, such as specifying whether the site name, IP address,
system time, or date is displayed.
The following operations are based on the remote controlled UI. Some parameters can also be set on the
web interface. To set the parameters on the web interface, log in to the web interface and choose System
Settings > Display > Site Name.
Step 1 On the remote controlled UI, choose Advanced > Settings > Display > Personalize.
Step 2 Set the custom parameters described in Table 9-3.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
9 Maintenance
Table 9-3 Custom parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting
Transparenc
Transparency of the remote controlled
UI against the background image.
The default value is 15%.
If you set this parameter to Opaque, the
background image is not displayed on
operation screens except the call and
menu screens.
If you set this parameter to other values,
the background image is visible on the
remote controlled UI.
Display IP
address
Specifies whether to display the local IP
address on the conferencing screen.
This parameter is selected by
default.
Select
conference
controls
Specifies the conference control
functions you want to display on the
Conference Control screen.
None
Site name
Specifies the site name you want to be
superimposed on the video of your site
when it displays to other sites.
The default value is site.
When your site joins a multipoint
conference, this site name is displayed in
the site list.
Display
position
Specifies the position where your site
name is superimposed on the video of
your site.
The default value is Lower
right corner.
Display
duration
Specifies the duration for displaying a
site name.
The default value is Always
display.
Display time
and zone
Specifies whether the time zone and time
are superimposed on the local video sent
to remote sites.
This parameter is not selected
by default.
The time zone and time are not displayed
on the local video shown on the display
device at your site.
Font color
Specifies the color in which a site name
is displayed.
The default color is white.
Font size
Specifies the font size for the site name
display.
The default value is Medium.
Bold
Specifies whether a site name is
displayed in bold.
This parameter is not selected
by default.
Background
color
Specifies the background color for the
site name display.
The default color is gray.
Transparenc
Specifies the transparency for the site
name display.
The default value is Fully
transparent.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
9 Maintenance
Parameter
Description
Setting
Set the
horizontal
offset
Fine-tunes the site name's position left or
right on the local video.
The default value is 48.
Set the
vertical
offset
Fine-tunes the site name's position up or
down on the local video.
Value range: 0-96.
The default value is 48.
Value range: 0-96.
Step 3 Select Save.
----End
9.4.3 Customizing Conference Control Functions to Be Displayed
You can customize the conference control functions you want to display on the Conference
control screen to quickly access these functions.
Background
The following conference control functions are displayed by default: Add Site, Disconnect
Site, Mute/Unmute MIC, Extend Conference, End Conference, Enable Chair Control,
Lock conference, and Restore Auto Continuous Presence.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Advanced > Settings > Display > Personalize > Select conference controls. Select
the conference control functions you want to display on the Conference control screen.
Step 2 Select Save.
----End
9.4.4 Customizing the Option Bar
You can customize icons on the option bar to facilitate access to the corresponding screens.
Background
To hide the option bar
Press the left arrow key or
on the remote control.
To show the option bar
Press
or
on the remote control.
Procedure
Step 1 Press
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
or
on the remote control to access the menu screen.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Step 2 Select
9 Maintenance
on the option bar to display the Customize Option Bar screen.
If the administrator password is not set to blank, to access the Customize Option Bar screen, you
must enter the administrator password whose default value is 12345678.
Step 3 Select the icon you want to move and select Up or Down.
To show or hide an icon on the option bar, press
deselect the icon.
on the remote control to select or
Step 4 Select OK.
----End
9.5 Checking the Endpoint Periodically
For preventive maintenance purposes, you need to check the audio, video, and communication
cables periodically.
Periodically (once a week is recommended) check that the cables connecting peripheral
equipment and the power supply to the endpoint are securely connected.
Periodically (once a week is recommended) check whether the communication cables
connected to the endpoint work properly.
Power on the endpoint and call some other endpoints using different methods, such as
calling over a broadband network. If a call cannot be set up, verify that the cables are
connected correctly and securely and the communication parameters are set correctly. If
the problem persists, contact the videoconferencing network administrator to check the
network.
9.6 Viewing System Status
System status information helps you maintain your endpoint.
On the endpoint web interface, choose Maintenance > System Status. On the System Status
page that is displayed, you can check:
Line status: includes the local IP address, alternate IP address, network interface mode,
WLAN IP address, information about whether GK is enabled, H.323 site number,
information about whether SIP is enabled, SIP site number, PSTN status, PSTN number
of a remote site, running duration, and camera status.
Call status: includes the conference number (or the IP address, number, or name of the
remote site), line rate, video resolution, video rate (frame rate), presentation resolution,
presentation rate (frame rate), audio rate, video packet loss rate, presentation packet loss
rate, audio packet loss rate, conference participating duration, and presentation token.
The call status is displayed only when your endpoint is in a conference.
Conference parameters: includes the call bandwidth, video protocol, video bandwidth
(frame rate), audio protocol, audio bandwidth, presentation protocol, presentation
bandwidth (frame rate), remote number, signaling encryption, media stream encryption,
conference number for video access, conference number for audio access, and password
for conference authentication. The conference parameters are displayed only when your
endpoint is in a conference.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
9 Maintenance
Input port status: includes the video information, USB1 and USB2 ports and air content
sharing information.
4E1 connection status (only for the TE60).
9.7 Querying System Information
System information helps you maintain your endpoint.
Choose Maintenance > System Information. On the displayed System Information page,
you can check:
Audio and video protocols and video resolutions supported by your endpoint
Network ports provided by your endpoint and the maximum bandwidth supported by
each port
Whether your endpoint supports the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Support for and capabilities of the built-in MCU
Whether your endpoint supports dual stream, namely, the video and presentation
Whether your endpoint supports H.235 encryption
Whether your endpoint is interoperable with Lync
Whether your endpoint supports recording, Scalable Video Coding (SVC), Wi-Fi, and
public switched telephone network (PSTN)
Maximum presentation resolution and codec capability of your endpoint
Connection status to the network diagnostics client
Valid term of the license
ESN
MAC address
9.8 Querying Logs
Logs record, in real time, all important events that occur when your endpoint runs. These
records assist you in maintaining your endpoint and locating system faults.
Background
Your endpoint can store a maximum of 10000 log records. When the memory for recording
logs is full, new logs can still be recorded by replacing the oldest one.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Logs. On the Logs page, specify one or more of the following
criteria to query logs:
Time when the log is created
Log level: Information, Warning, Error, or All levels
Log type: 4E1(only TE60), Main control, WEB, UI, BSP, Audio, Video, Protocol, or
All
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
9 Maintenance
Step 2 Click Query.
----End
9.9 Restoring Your Endpoint to Default Settings
You can use the Restore Default function to restore your endpoint to its default settings.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the serial number of your endpoint.
To obtain the serial number of your endpoint, choose Help > Version.
Background
Restoring your endpoint to its default settings causes the loss of certain stored information, for
example, site information in the address book, call records, and logs.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose System Settings > Installation.
The Installation page is displayed.
Step 2 Click Restore Default.
Step 3 Enter the serial number of your endpoint.
Step 4 Click Restore Default and confirm your operation.
----End
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
10 Troubleshooting
10
Troubleshooting
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to diagnose and troubleshoot endpoint faults.
10.1 Understanding Diagnosis Methods
The endpoint supports the following diagnosis methods: sound and color bar tests, loopback
tests, network tests, one-click diagnosis, signaling diagnostics, tracert, and remote control
tests.
10.2 Common Faults
This section describes the problems you might encounter when using your endpoint and
provides solutions.
10.1 Understanding Diagnosis Methods
The endpoint supports the following diagnosis methods: sound and color bar tests, loopback
tests, network tests, one-click diagnosis, signaling diagnostics, tracert, and remote control
tests.
Figure 10-1 shows the diagnosis model for your endpoint.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
10 Troubleshooting
Figure 10-1 Diagnosis model
According to Figure 10-1, diagnosis functions diagnoses the audio module, video module, and
network module.
Audio signals are transmitted in the following paths:
Local microphone → 1 → 5 → Communications network → 6 → 7 → Remote speaker
Local speaker ← 2 ← 5 ← Communications network ← 6 ← 8 ← Remote microphone
Video signals are transmitted in the following paths:
Local camera → 3 → 5 → Communications network → 6 → 9 → Remote monitor
Local display ← 4 ← 5 ← Communications network ← 6 ← 10 ← Remote camera
Sound and Color Bar Tests
Table 10-1 lists the sound and color bar tests.
Table 10-1 Sound and color bar tests
Test
Item to Be Tested
Signal Stream
Sound
2 audio output
2 → Speaker
Color bar
4 video output
4 → Monitor
Sound test: Choose Maintenance > Diagnostics. On the Diagnostics page, click Sound
Test. While the test audio stored on your endpoint plays, check the sound quality.
Color bar test: Choose Maintenance > Diagnostics. On the Diagnostics page, click
Color Bar Test. Seven color bars are shown on the display for you to check the color
quality.
Loopback Test
Your endpoint can transmit audio or video data on a channel to simulate an actual application
and test whether the output is satisfactory. You can perform a local loopback test to check the
local network connection or a remote loopback test to check the remote network connection.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
10 Troubleshooting
When you perform a remote loopback test, data is transmitted from your site to a remote site,
and then back to your site. Table 10-2 lists the types of loopback tests available on your
endpoint.
To enable your endpoint to communicate with other endpoints, stop the loopback test.
You cannot perform a loopback test on remote video if you are in a dual-stream
conference.
Table 10-2 Loopback tests
Test
Item to Be Tested
Signal Stream
Audio loopback
Local audio module
Microphone → 1 → 2 → Speaker
Video loopback
Local video module
Camera → 3 → 4 → Monitor
Digital loopback
Local audio and video
modules
The endpoint performs local audio and
video loopback tests simultaneously.
Remote audio
loopback
Remote audio module
Network transmission
Remote video
loopback
Remote video module
Network transmission
Camera → 3 → 5 → 6 → 9 → 10 → 6
→ 5 → 4 → Monitor
Remote digital
loopback
Remote audiovisual
modules
The endpoint performs remote audio and
video loopback tests simultaneously.
Network transmission
Microphone → 1 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 →
6 → 5 → 2 → Speaker
Network Test
Table 10-3 Network test
Test
Item to Be Tested
Signal Stream
Network
IP access
endpoint → LAN or public network
Before a test, verify that the LAN network port indicator is green, which indicates that your
endpoint is correctly connected to an IP network.
In IP address, enter an IP address that is in a different network segment from your
endpoint IP address. Then click Start. If the test succeeds, the gateway settings and IP
address of your endpoint are correct.
If your endpoint is on a private network, in IP address, enter a public IP address. Then
click Start. If the test succeeds, the gateway settings, NAT address, and IP address of
your endpoint are correct.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
10 Troubleshooting
One-Click Diagnosis
Web administrators and API users can perform one-click diagnosis on the endpoint. The
diagnosis file helps with fault identification.
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > One-Click Diagnosis.
The One-Click Diagnosis dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click Start to start diagnosis.
The diagnosis takes about 5 minutes.
Step 3 Click Download to save the diagnosis file to the local computer.
----End
Signaling Diagnostics
Web administrators and API users can perform signaling diagnostics and export the
diagnostics file from the endpoint web interface. The diagnostics file helps with fault
identification.
Only one user can perform signaling diagnostics.
If not manually stopped, signaling diagnostics automatically stops after 10 minutes or
when the diagnostics file size reaches 10 MB.
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Signaling Diagnostics.
The Signaling Diagnostics dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click Start to start signaling diagnostics.
When prompted, click OK.
Signaling diagnostics does not monitor media stream data, but will obtain site information, such as site
numbers. Perform this operation with caution.
Step 3 Click Stop to stop signaling diagnostics.
Step 4 Click Download to save the diagnostics file to the local computer.
----End
Route Test
A route test helps determine the path that a data packet at the network layer uses to access a
destination address.
Before you perform route test, choose System Settings > Network > Network diagnostics
and set Network diagnostics to Enable.
Table 10-4 lists the parameters that you need to set before performing a route test.
Table 10-4 Route parameters
Parameter
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Description
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Setting
158
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
10 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Description
Setting
IP address
Specifies the IP address of
the destination device.
Example: 10.10.10.1
Maximum hops
Specifies the maximum
allowed hops.
Example: 5
Timeout time(s)
Specifies the timeout
duration for the call waiting
time, in seconds.
Example: 1
Remote Control Test
Test the keys on the remote control to check whether they are functioning properly. If only
some of the keys are tested, you can exit the Remote Control Test screen by pressing and
holding
on the remote control.
When all the keys are tested, the Remote Control Test screen automatically exits.
The normal operating distance of the remote control is 6 meters. Its performance may be
affected under strong light.
If the remote control does not work, verify that:
The endpoint is powered on.
The positive and negative charges of the battery are connected correctly.
The battery has sufficient power left.
There are no special fluorescent or neon signs nearby.
When using the remote control to operate the endpoint, you can use the camera to forward
infrared signals to the endpoint. To enable the camera to forward infrared signals, choose
Advanced > Settings > Video > Common Settings > Video Input and set Infrared camera
is used to control the endpoint to Yes.
10.2 Common Faults
This section describes the problems you might encounter when using your endpoint and
provides solutions.
Web Interface
Table 10-5 lists the troubleshooting methods for problems that may arise on the endpoint web
interface.
Table 10-5 methods for troubleshooting endpoint web interface problems
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
A message is
displayed to
The latest patches for the
operating system or Internet
Install the latest patches for the
operating system and Internet
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
10 Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
indicate that your
endpoint failed to
connect to the
Internet or
download images.
Explorer are not installed.
Explorer.
The security level of Internet
Explorer is too high, or your
endpoint IP address has not
been added to the list of
trusted sites.
1. From the Internet Explorer
menu bar, choose Tools >
Internet Options.
2. Click the Security tab,
Trusted sites, and then Sites.
3. In Add this Web site to the
zone, enter your endpoint IP
address. Then click Add.
4. Click OK.
Button text is not
fully displayed.
Internet Explorer is set to
ignore the font styles specified
on web pages. In this case, the
font specified by your
endpoint cannot be
recognized.
1. From the Internet Explorer
menu bar, choose Tools >
Internet Options.
2. Under Appearance on the
General tab, click
Accessibility.
3. In the Accessibility dialog box,
deselect all options.
4. Click OK.
If Internet Explorer
6 is used, the
endpoint web
interface responds
to operations
slowly.
The JavaScript engine of
Internet Explorer 6 is not
upgraded, or the required
patches are not installed.
Install Microsoft Windows
Script 5.7 (recommended).
Install the patches.
The records of the
local address book
cannot be exported.
The pop-up blocker is enabled
on your browser.
If Internet Explorer is used: On
the Internet Explorer menu bar,
choose Tools > Pop-up
Blocker > Turn Off Pop-up
Blocker.
If the Firefox is used: Choose
Tools > Options. On the
General tab, select Show the
Downloads window when
downloading a file. On the
Privacy tab, select Accept
cookies from sites. Then click
OK to save the settings.
Network
Table 10-6 lists the troubleshooting methods for problems that may arise on the network.
Table 10-6 Methods for troubleshooting common network problems
Problem
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Possible Cause
Solution
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
10 Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
When you
attempt to use
Telnet to access
the endpoint, a
message is
displayed to
indicate that the
number of
connections to
the endpoint has
reached the limit.
The number of
connections to the
endpoint has reached the
maximum value.
Disconnect some Telnet connections.
NOTE
 A maximum of seven
SSH
and
Telnet
connections to the
endpoint is allowed.
A maximum of three
SSH connections to the
endpoint is allowed.
Video
Table 10-7 lists the troubleshooting methods for video problems.
Table 10-7 Methods for troubleshooting video problems
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
While the endpoint
is powered on and
not in a conference,
the display device
does not display the
remote controlled
UI or the video of
your site.
The display device is powered
off.
Power on the display device.
The video channel of the
display device is incorrect.
Use the remote control to select
the correct video channel.
The video settings of the
endpoint or display device are
incorrect. For example, the
brightness is set to 0.
Retain the default values for the
video parameters on the endpoint
and display device.
The video cable connection is
not secure.
Secure the video cable between
the endpoint and display device.
No display device is
connected to the output port
for the remote controlled UI or
the connected display device
is faulty.
Connect a display device to the
output port for the remote
controlled UI and verify the video
settings on the display device.
The output port for the remote
controlled UI is not set or the
output port you set for the
remote control UI is not the
port connected to the display
device.
Choose Advanced > Settings >
Video > Common Settings >
Video Output. Set GUI to the
output port connected to the
display device.
The endpoint does not respond
to remote control operations.
Telnet to the endpoint. If you fail
to operate the endpoint, it is
malfunctioning. In this case,
restart the endpoint. If the problem
persists, contact the local
While the endpoint
is powered on and
not in use during a
conference, the
display device
displays the video
of your site but
cannot display the
remote controlled
UI.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Problem
Possible Cause
10 Troubleshooting
Solution
distributor for maintenance.
While the endpoint
is in use during a
conference, the
display device
displays the video
of your site but
cannot display the
video of any remote
site.
The video of your
site is in black and
white or flickers in
black and white.
While the endpoint
is in use during a
conference, the
video of a remote
site is not clear. For
example, there are
artifacts, frozen
images, or
discontinuity in the
video output.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
A local or remote loopback
test is being performed.
Stop all local and remote loopback
tests.
Check the call statistics. If the
value of Video
bandwidth[frame rate] is 0,
no video is sent from remote
sites.
Contact the remote site
administrator to resolve this
problem.
If the remote video is
displayed as a blue screen, the
remote site is blocking its
video by sending a blue
screen.
Contact the remote site
administrator to resolve this
problem.
The video output port is set to
display the video of your site.
Set the video output port to
display the video of a remote site.
The mode adopted by the
video output port is set
incorrectly.
Ensure that the mode adopted
by the video output port and
the cable in use match each
other.
Verify that the cable is
connected correctly. Replace
the cable if necessary.
Faults occur in the local video
module.
Perform a local video loopback
test. If the video quality is poor,
faults occur in the local video
module. In this case, send the
endpoint to the local distributor for
maintenance.
The remote camera is set to
focus on a close or distant
scene. When the remote
camera is not set to automatic
focus and the scene captured
by a remote camera changes,
the captured video becomes
unclear.
Set the remote camera to
automatic focus.
Incorrect audio protocols are
specified for conferences
whose data transmission rates
are lower than or equal to 256
kbit/s. To view the data
transmission rate of a
conference, access the Status
screen. For example, if the
conference rate is 256 kbit/s
and the audio bandwidth is 64
kbit/s, the video bandwidth is
If the conference rate is lower than
256 kbit/s, set the audio protocol
to G.728 to reduce the bandwidth
used for audio transmission.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Problem
Possible Cause
10 Troubleshooting
Solution
only 196 kbit/s. In this case,
the video quality is poor.
Only low video bandwidth is
available for your site because
the network is busy.
Do not initiate conferences during
network busy hours.
The quality of a network
connection device, such as an
optical fiber transceiver, is
poor. As a result, certain data
is lost during transmission.
Replace the related network
connection device.
While the endpoint
is in use during a
conference, the
video of a remote
site can be
displayed
continuously but the
video quality is not
satisfactory.
Ask the remote site
administrator to perform a
local video loopback test. If
the video quality is good, the
video frame rate set at the
remote site is too high.
Ask the administrator of the
remote site to disconnect from the
conference, set the video frame
rate to a smaller value, and join
the conference again.
While the endpoint
is not in use during
a conference, the
video displayed on
the display device is
too bright or too
dark.
The video settings of the
endpoint are inappropriate.
Retain the default values for the
video parameters on the endpoint
and display device.
The video settings of the
display device are
inappropriate.
Retain the default values for the
video parameters on the endpoint
and display device.
The camera is faulty.
Send the endpoint to the local
distributor for maintenance.
The resolution of the remote
computer exceeds the
maximum resolution
supported by the endpoint.
Ask the remote site administrator
to change the resolution and
refresh rate of the remote
computer to those the endpoint
supports.
The local VGA display is not
supported.
Replace the local VGA display
with a supported display.
The presentation sharing
function is not enabled at your
site.
Choose Advanced > Settings >
Conference > Advanced and
select Presentation.
The capability of the VGA
display is limited. The
resolution or refresh rate of
the local SXGA output is too
high to be supported by the
VGA display.
Set the resolution and refresh rate
of the local SXGA output to those
the VGA display supports.
The endpoint supports only
certain combinations of
Set the resolution and refresh rate
of the computer used for the VGA
While the endpoint
is in use during a
conference and a
remote site is
sharing its computer
desktop, the local
VGA display cannot
display the shared
computer desktop.
A computer is
connected to the
endpoint, but the
local VGA display
does not show the
computer desktop.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Problem
On the camera
control screen,
, and
navigation keys on
the remote control
cannot be used to
control the camera.
While the endpoint
is in use during a
conference and the
display device
displays the video
of a remote site,
after you press
10 Troubleshooting
Possible Cause
Solution
resolutions and refresh rates.
The combination of the
resolution and refresh rate set
on the computer, however, is
not supported by the endpoint.
In this case, the local site
cannot display or properly
display the computer desktop.
input to those the endpoint
supports.
The presentation source is not
set as the computer desktop.
Choose Advanced > Settings >
Video > Common Settings >
Video Input. Set Presentation
Source to the input port connected
to the computer desktop.
The dual screen function is not
enabled.
Choose Advanced > Settings >
Video > Common Settings >
Video Output and set
Presentation display to Enable.
The camera you want to
control is not selected.
Access the camera control screen
and select the camera you want to
control.
Camera settings are incorrect.
Verify the camera settings.
The remote control is disabled
on the remote camera.
Ask the remote site administrator
to enable the remote camera
control at the remote site.
The camera settings are
incorrect or the control cable
of the camera is not securely
connected.
Ask the remote site administrator
to verify the camera settings or
securely connect the camera
control cable.
, or
navigation keys on
the remote control,
the video remains
unchanged. That is,
you cannot control
the remote camera.
Audio
Table 10-8 lists the troubleshooting methods for audio problems.
Table 10-8 Methods for troubleshooting audio problems
Problem
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Possible Cause
Solution
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
10 Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
Current noise is
generated when the
endpoint's audio
output ports are
connected to audio
devices, such as
speakers, tuning
consoles, and audio
matrices.
Disconnect the endpoint's
audio output ports from the
audio devices. Check whether
the problem is rectified.
Replace the cables or repair the
audio devices.
While the endpoint
is in use during a
conference, no
audio is delivered
from the local
display device.
If the problem persists, the
current noise is caused by
audio device or cable issues.
If the problem is rectified,
check the grounding status of
the audio devices and
endpoint.
If the audio devices' shells are
grounded, the endpoint's shell
must be grounded nearby.
If the audio devices' shells are
not grounded, the endpoint's
shell does not need to be
grounded either. Specifically,
change the endpoint's AC
three-core power supply to
two-core power supply.
Perform an audio test to check
whether the problem occurs at
your site or a remote site.
If the chair site has muted the
speaker of your site, contact the
chair site to resolve this
problem.
If the display device volume is
adjusted to the lowest, restore
the volume to its default value.
If the endpoint volume is
adjusted to the lowest, restore
the volume to its default value.
If the audio cable is connected
incorrectly or insecurely,
reconnect the audio cable from
the endpoint to the display
device.
The microphone at the remote
site has been muted or the chair
site has muted this microphone.
In this case, contact the chair
site to resolve this problem.
No sound pickup device, such
as a microphone, is connected
to the audio input port. In this
case, set the audio source again
or connect a sound pickup
device to the corresponding
port.
The related sound pickup
device is powered off. In this
case, power on the device.
The audio cable is connected
If no audio is delivered from
the display device during the
audio test, the problem exists
at your site.
If audio is properly delivered
from the display device during
the audio test, the problem
occurs at the remote site.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Problem
Possible Cause
10 Troubleshooting
Solution
insecurely. In this case,
reconnect the audio cable to the
endpoint.
While the endpoint
is in use during a
conference, only the
sound from your
site can be delivered
from the display
device and you
cannot hear other
sites.
A loopback test is being
performed at your site.
Stop all local and remote loopback
tests.
Conference Initiation
Table 10-9 lists the troubleshooting methods for problems you may encounter during
conference initiation.
Table 10-9 Methods for troubleshooting common problems with conference initiation
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
Your site and a
remote site cannot
call each other using
site numbers.
Your site or the remote site
has not registered with a GK.
A GK is responsible for
translating site numbers into
IP addresses. If either your
site or the remote site does not
register with a GK, the
translation cannot be
implemented, and your site
cannot place a call to the
remote site using the site
number.
Verify GK registration settings
and register your site and the
remote site with a GK.
If a remote site places a call to
your site by site number, it
will receive a message from
the GK indicating that your
site has not registered with the
GK, and the call cannot be set
up.
The local or remote endpoint
is not connected to an IP
network.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
1. Verify that the endpoint is
connected to an IP network.
Specifically, the LAN indicator
on the rear panel of the
endpoint is steady green.
2. From the remote controlled UI,
choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Problem
Possible Cause
10 Troubleshooting
Solution
Enter the IP address of the
remote site and start a Ping
test. If the Ping test fails, a
network error has occurred. In
this case, contact the
administrator.
3. From the remote controlled UI,
choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP
network settings.
Your site cannot
place a call to a
remote site using
the IP address of the
remote site.
After the endpoint
starts, it fails to
register with the
GK.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
The local or remote endpoint
is not connected to an IP
network.
1. Verify that the endpoint is
connected to an IP network.
Specifically, the LAN indicator
on the rear panel of the
endpoint is steady green.
2. From the remote controlled UI,
choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test.
Enter the IP address of the
remote site and start a Ping
test. If the Ping test fails, a
network error has occurred. In
this case, contact the
administrator.
3. From the remote controlled UI,
choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP
network settings.
NAT settings are incorrect.
Specifically, the local
endpoint is on a private
network while the remote
endpoint is on a public or
different private network.
Check whether your endpoint
can communicate with a
public network. If the
endpoint cannot, NAT settings
are incorrect.
Choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > Firewall and verify
NAT settings.
The GK with which the local
or remote endpoint registers
does not support the function
for placing calls using IP
addresses.
Choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP > H.323 at your site
and the remote site, respectively.
Then, disable GK functions.
The parameters (GK address,
encryption password, and user
name) used for GK
registration are incorrect.
On the endpoint web interface,
choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP > H.323 and
correct the settings.
Another site with the same
number as your site has
Contact the videoconferencing
system administrator to check
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Problem
A predefined
conference fails to
be initiated on the
endpoint.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
10 Troubleshooting
Possible Cause
Solution
already registered with the
GK.
whether another site with the same
number as your site has already
registered with the GK. If such a
site exists, change the user name
of your site.
The endpoint is disconnected
from an IP network.
1. Verify that the endpoint is
connected to an IP network.
Specifically, the LAN indicator
on the rear panel of the
endpoint is steady green.
2. From the remote controlled UI,
choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test.
Enter the IP address of the
remote site and start a Ping
test. If the Ping test fails, a
network error has occurred. In
this case, contact the
administrator.
3. From the remote controlled UI,
choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP
network settings.
NAT settings are incorrect.
Specifically, the local
endpoint is on a private
network while the GK is on a
public network. Check
whether your endpoint can
communicate with a public
network. If the endpoint
cannot, NAT settings are
incorrect.
Choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > Firewall and verify
NAT settings.
The GK listening port, such as
port 1719, is restricted by the
network firewall.
Contact the videoconferencing
system administrator to resolve
this problem.
The endpoint is disconnected
from an IP network.
1. Verify that the endpoint is
connected to an IP network.
Specifically, the LAN indicator
on the rear panel of the
endpoint is steady green.
2. From the remote controlled UI,
choose Advanced >
Diagnostics > Network Test.
Enter the IP address of the
remote site and start a Ping
test. If the Ping test fails, a
network error has occurred. In
this case, contact the
administrator.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Problem
Possible Cause
10 Troubleshooting
Solution
3. From the remote controlled UI,
choose Advanced > Settings >
Network > IP. Verify IP
network settings.
Your site is set to pay for
the conference but does
not have sufficient account
balance.
Another site is set to pay
for the conference but does
not have sufficient account
balance, or account
number or password
entered is incorrect.
Enter the correct account number
and password and top up the
related account.
Multiple conferences are
currently being held while
port resources on the
videoconferencing system are
insufficient.
Wait until the resources are
available. Alternatively, reduce the
number of sites attending the
conference and then add sites as
required after the conference is
held successfully.
The SiteCall account for using
the 4E1 lines is incorrect.
Contact the videoconferencing
system administrator to resolve
this problem.
Conference Control
Table 10-10 lists the troubleshooting methods for common problems you may encounter
during conference control.
Table 10-10 Methods for troubleshooting conference control problems
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
While the endpoint
is in use during a
conference, you
cannot view the
desired site.
A site in the conference is being
broadcast, and all the sites must view
that site except the chair site and
broadcast site.
Ask the chair site to stop
site broadcast.
A site is having the floor, and
non-chair sites cannot view other
sites.
Ask the chair site to enable
the discussion function.
The chair site has enabled the Voice
Activation function.
Ask the chair site to
disable the Voice
Activation function.
No video is sent from the site you
want to view.
Ask the related site
administrator to
troubleshoot the site video.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Problem
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
10 Troubleshooting
Possible Cause
Solution
The View Site function is restricted
on the RM or the SMC.
Contact the
videoconferencing system
administrator to resolve
this problem.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
11
11 Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the product specifications, external ports, system performance and
capacity, and standards compliance.
11.1 Physical Specifications
11.2 Performance and Capacity
11.3 Ports and Protocols
11.4 Standards Compliance
11.1 Physical Specifications
Table 11-1 Physical specifications
Item
Specifications
Electricity supply requirements
Operating voltage
and frequency
100 V AC–240 V AC; 50 Hz–60 Hz;
Maximum power
consumption
TE60: 150W
TE50: 60W
TE40: 60W
Working state environment requirements
Ambient
temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Relative humidity
10% to 80%
Ambient noise
< 46 dBA SPL
Minimum
illuminance
7lux
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Item
Specifications
Recommended
illuminance
> 300 lux
11 Technical Specifications
Non-working state environment requirements
Ambient
temperature
–40°C to +85°C
Relative humidity
0% to 95%
Physical specifications
Codec
dimensions (H x
W x D)
72.5 mm x 435 mm x 265.5 mm (2.85 in. x 17.13 in. x 10.45 in)
Weight
TE60: 4.6 kg (net weight)
TE50: 4.1 kg (net weight)
TE40: 3.9 kg (net weight)
11.2 Performance and Capacity
Table 11-2 lists the endpoint performance and capacity specifications.
Table 11-2 Performance and capacity
Item
Specifications
Call bandwidth
(IP)
64 kbit/s-8 Mbit/s
Call bandwidth
(4E1, only TE60)
64 kbit/s-8 Mbit/s
Video resolution
1080p60 with a minimum bandwidth of 1 Mbit/s (optional)
1080p30 with a minimum bandwidth of 512 kbit/s (only TE40 is
optional)
720p60 with a minimum bandwidth of 512 kbit/s (only TE40 is
optional)
720p30 with a minimum bandwidth of 384 kbit/s
4SIF/4CIF with a minimum bandwidth of 128 kbit/s
SIF/CIF with a minimum bandwidth of 64 kbit/s
SQSIF/SQCIF/QSIF/QCIF with a minimum bandwidth of 64
kbit/s
Input: 1920 x 1200 60fps, 1080p 60fps, 1680 x 1050 60fps, 1600
x 1200 60fps, 1600 x 900 60fps, 1400 x 1050 60fps, 1440 x 900
60fps, 1366 x 768 60fps, 1360 x 768 60fps, 1280 x 1024
60/75/85fps, 1280 x 960 60/75/85fps, 1280 x 800 60/75/85fps,
Presentation
resolution
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Item
11 Technical Specifications
Specifications
1280 x 768 60/75/85fps, 1280 x 600 60fps, 1152 x 864
60/75/85fps, 720p 60/75/85fps, 1024 x 768 60/70/75/85fps, 800 x
600 56/60/72/75/85fps, 640 x 480 60/72/75/85fps
Other video
features
Output: 1600 x 1200, 1920 x 1200, 1920 x 1080, 1280 x 1024,
1280 x 720, 1024 x 768, 800 x 600
Coding/Decoding resolution: 1600 x 1200, 1920 x 1200, 1920 x
1080, 1280 x 1024, 1280 x 720, 1024 x 768, 800 x 600, 4CIF, CIF
dual 1080p60
Video Motion Enhancement
VideoIntensifier
ViewProcessing
Super Error Concealment
Audio features
AEC, ANS, AGC, VoiceClear, AudioEnhancer, and lip
synchronization
Built-in MCU
capability
TE40: six 720p30 video sites and three audio-only sites
TE50: six 720p30 video sites and three audio-only sites
TE60: nine 720p30 video sites and three audio-only sites
11.3 Ports and Protocols
Table 11-3 Ports on the TE60
Port
Description and
Quantity
Video
input
1 x HDMI/DVI
(audio input
supported)
2 x DVI-I (HDMI,
VGA, and YPbPr
supported with
conversion cables)
2 x HD-VI/DVI
1x
CVBS/S-VIDEO
(converted from a
DVI-I port)
1 x DisplayPort
1 x 3G-SDI
2 x HDMI/DVI
(audio output
Video
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Standards and
Protocols
Compliance
Remarks
DVI1.0 VESA
HD-VI port for
VPC600/VPC620
DVI1.0 VESA
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Port
Description and
Quantity
output
Audio
input
Audio
output
11 Technical Specifications
Standards and
Protocols
Compliance
Remarks
USB 2.0
Currently, the PSTN
port can be used in
China only.
supported)
2 x DVI-I (HDMI,
VGA, and YPbPr
supported with
conversion cables)
1x
CVBS/S-VIDEO
(converted from a
DVI-I port)
1 x 3G-SDI
1 x XLR
2 x RCA
1 x HDMI
1 x HD-AI
1 x DisplayPort
4 x RCA
2 x HDMI
2 x DVI-I (with the
use of a DVI-HDMI
cable)
USB port
2 x USB 2.0
Network
port
2 x 10/100/1000M
LAN
1 x Wi-Fi (built-in)
1 x 4E1 (optional)
1 x PSTN
Serial port
2 x RS232
Infrared
remote
control port
Infrared signal
reception
NEC
Standards and
Protocols
Compliance
Remarks
Table 11-4 Ports on the TE50
Port
Description and
Quantity
Video
input
1 x HD-VI/DVI
DVI1.0 VESA
1 x HDMI/DVI
(audio inpu t
HDMI 1.3
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HD-VI port for
VPC600/VPC620
174
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Port
Description and
Quantity
11 Technical Specifications
Standards and
Protocols
Compliance
Remarks
DVI1.0 VESA
USB 2.0
Currently, the PSTN
port can be used in
China only.
supported)
1 x VGA/YPbPr
1 x 3G-SDI
1 x CVBS
2 x HDMI/DVI
(audio output
supported)
1 x VGA/YPbPr
1 x 3G-SDI
1 x CVBS
1 x XLR
2 x RCA
1 x HDMI
1 x HD-AI
1 x 3.5mm
Audio
output
4 x RCA
2 x HDMI
USB port
2 x USB 2.0
Network
port
2 x 10/100/1000M
LAN
1 x Wi-Fi (built-in)
1 x PSTN
Video
output
Audio
input
Serial port
2 x RS232
Infrared
remote
control port
Infrared signal
reception
NEC
Standards and
Protocols
Compliance
Remarks
Table 11-5 Ports on the TE40
Port
Description and
Quantity
Video
input
1 x HD-VI/DVI
DVI1.0 VESA
1 x HDMI/DVI
(audio input
supported)
HDMI 1.3
1 x VGA/YPbPr
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HD-VI port for
VPC600/VPC620
175
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Port
Description and
Quantity
Video
output
2 x HDMI/DVI
(audio output
supported)
1 x VGA/YPbPr
1 x XLR
2 x RCA
1 x HDMI
1 x HD-AI
Audio
output
4 x RCA
2 x HDMI
USB port
2 x USB 2.0
Network
port
2 x 10/100/1000M
LAN
1 x Wi-Fi (built-in)
1 x PSTN
Audio
input
11 Technical Specifications
Standards and
Protocols
Compliance
Remarks
DVI1.0 VESA
USB 2.0
Currently, the PSTN
port can be used in
China only.
Serial port
2 x RS232 COM
Infrared
remote
control port
Infrared signal
reception
NEC
11.4 Standards Compliance
Table 11-6 lists the standards that the endpoint complies with.
Table 11-6 Standards compliance
Item
Specifications
Video encoding and
decoding protocols
H.264 SVC, H.264 HP, H.264 BP, H.263, and H.263+
Video encoding and
decoding protocols
AAC-LD, G.711A, G.711U, G.719, G.722, G.728, G.729A,
HWA-LD, G.722.1, and G.722.1C
Multimedia frame
protocols
ITU-T H.323 and IETF SIP
Dual-stream standard
ITU-T H.239 and BFCP
Network
transmission
TCP/IP, RTP, RTCPFTP, DHCP, SNMP, Telnet, HTTP, SSH,
HTTPS, PPPoE, and SNTP
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Item
11 Technical Specifications
Specifications
protocols
Other
communications
protocols
H.225, H.235, H.241, H.245, H.281, H.350, H.460, T.140
IP protocol
IPv4/IPv6 dual stack
Protocol for signaling
and media stream
encryption
H.235; TLS, SRTP
H.323 remote camera
control
H.281 and H.224
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
A E1 and T1 Grounding Criteria
E1 and T1 Grounding Criteria
Read the following grounding criteria carefully and comply with the relevant requirements
during the installation of the endpoint.
The grounding design of the telecom office (station) follows the principle of equalized voltage.
That is, the work grounding and the protection grounding (including the shielded grounding
and the surge protection grounding of the distribution frame) share a set of grounding
conductors.
When the E1 cable of the cabinet is over 7.5 m and the T1 cable of the cabinet is over 10 m, a
shielded cable and a shielded connector should be used and grounded.
When the E1 interface is connected to other devices using coaxial cables, the external shield
layers at the transmitting endpoint and receiving endpoint should be connected to the
protection ground at the same time. The dual in-line package (DIP) switch offers the possible
disconnection function at the receiving end.
Copper-core materials instead of aluminum materials should be used for the ground cable.
The plastic insulated copper wires with yellow and green insulation color should be used for
the protective ground cable. The protective ground cable should not exceed 30 m, and the
shorter the better. When the protective ground cable exceeds 30 m, the ground bar should be
rearranged.
In a balanced circuit, the joint of the E1 (T1) cable and the connector should be grounded
using the external shield layer (the grounding conductor) or an additional wire to ensure
normal reception and transmission in each E1 (T1) channel. In an unbalanced circuit, the
metal braid shield layer of the cable should be seamlessly connected to the coaxial connector.
When the E1 cable exceeds 30 m and the T1 cable exceeds 40 m, use the multi-point
grounding mode. In addition, connect the E1 cable to the ground at every 15 m and the T1
cable to the ground at every 20 m.
When the E1 or T1 cable is extended out of the office (station), the E1 or T1 cable should go
through the main distribution frame (MDF) attached with the security unit. The shield layer of
the E1 or T1 cable should be firmly connected to the protection ground of the MDF. The
security unit on the MDF should have the overvoltage protection, overcurrent protection, and
failure alarm functions. The maintenance personnel should check the equipment periodically
and replace the ineffective protection unit in time.
For questions about grounding the device, contact the device provider for technical support.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
B Menu Structure of the Remote Controlled UI
Menu Structure of the Remote
Controlled UI
This section describes the structure of the menus, which helps users to quickly identify each
function item.
The Advanced tab on the menu screen is the interface to all the function configuration items
of the endpoint. Figure B-1 shows the menu structure.
Figure B-1 Menu structure
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
B Menu Structure of the Remote Controlled UI
Only the TE60 supports 4E1 functions.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
C Requirements on Room Layout and Lighting
Requirements on Room Layout and
Lighting
When using the endpoint, pay attention to your sitting posture to avoid problems associated
with your back. Do not stare at the monitor screen for a long time. This may harm your eyes
or blur your vision.
Layout Precautions
Ensure that there are no large or moving objects behind you. Otherwise, the video cannot
be viewed clearly.
Do not use striped patterns as the background.
Do not hold a conference in a room that generates a lot of echoing.
Do not place the endpoint near a sound source.
Lighting Precautions
To ensure high video quality, do not turn the lens towards bright lights.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
D Status Icons
Status Icons
The icons provided on the user interface indicate the status and settings of the system.
The icons help show the system status and perform operations as required. Table D-1 lists the
icons that will appear on the lower-right corner of the call screen and indicate the current
network status. Before initiating a conference, check the status of these icons.
Table D-1 Network status icons
Icon
Name
Indicates...
SIP registration
failure
The endpoint fails to be registered with
the SIP server.
GK registration
failure
The endpoint fails to register with the
gatekeeper after the gatekeeper is
enabled.
Network
disconnection
The endpoint is disconnected from an
IP network. The network cable may be
disconnected.
DNS resolution
failure
After the DNS server is enabled and
domain names are adopted as SIP
server or GK server addresses, the DNS
server fails to resolve the domain
names.
Wi-Fi connection
status
The first icon indicates that the Wi-Fi
network has disconnected after the
Wi-Fi client is enabled.
The other icon indicates the signal
status of a connected Wi-Fi network.
When you view a video, the icons listed in Table D-2 are used to indicate the status of certain
operations. During a conference, pay attention to the status of these icons to ensure that the
relevant operations are performed correctly.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
D Status Icons
Table D-2 Operating status icons
Icon
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Name
Indicates...
Microphone status
The status of the microphone of the local site
when displayed on the lower right corner of the
screen. In this case, the microphone is a
physical device used at the local site. When
one of these icons is displayed in other
positions of the screen, it indicates the
microphone status of a remote site in a
conference.
Speaker status
The status of the speaker of the local site when
displayed on the lower right corner of the
screen. When one of these icons is displayed in
other positions of the screen, it indicates the
speaker status of a remote site in a conference.
Encrypted
conference
The current conference is an encrypted
conference (with media streams encrypted).
Chair
The local site is the chair site.
Remote site
A remote site is currently being viewed.
Local site
The local site is currently being viewed.
Presentation sharing
A presentation is currently being shared.
Local site broadcast
The local site is being broadcast in the current
conference.
Do Not Disturb
The Do Not Disturb function is enabled at the
local site.
Hide Video
The local video is hidden during a conference.
You can use this function to prevent the local
video from being seen by remote sites. After
this function is enabled, the local site is
displayed as a blue screen at remote sites.
Camera control (up
and down)
The camera lens is turned upward or
downward.
Camera control (left
and right)
The camera lens is turned leftward or
rightward.
Camera control
(zooming)
The video input from the camera is shrank or
enlarged.
Poor network
condition
Network impairments or packet loss occurs in
the network where the endpoint is located. see
9.4.1 Customizing Onscreen Status Icons.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
Icon
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
D Status Icons
Name
Indicates...
Video monitoring
A remote site is recording or taking photos of
the conference from the endpoint web
interface.
Recording
The current conference is being recorded.
Connected to a
VPM220W
The endpoint is connected to a VPM220W.
The first icon indicates that the VPM220W has
insufficient battery while the other icon
indicates a sufficient battery.
Remote site muted
The remote site is muted, and the local site
cannot hear the remote site.
Local site's speaker
muted by the chair
site
The chair site mutes the local site's speaker so
the local site cannot hear other sites.
Local site's
microphone muted
by the chair site
The chair site mutes the local site's microphone
so other sites cannot hear the local site.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
E Default Settings
Default Settings
To better use the endpoint, get to know the default values of common user names and
passwords.
Table E-1 lists the default user names and passwords for the endpoint.
Table E-1 Default user names and passwords
Item
Default Setting
Administrator password for the
remote controlled UI
12345678
Administrator user name and
password for the endpoint web
interface
The default user name and password are admin and
Change_Me respectively.
Upgrade password
Change_Me
Air content sharing password
Change_Me
User name and password for
connecting the touch panel to the
endpoint
The default user name and password are api and
Change_Me respectively.
User name and password for logging
in to the endpoint in Telnet mode
Debug user: The default user name and
password are debug and Change_Me
respectively.
Administrator: The default user name and
password are admin and Change_Me
respectively.
Common user: The default user name and
password are user and Change_Me
respectively.
Test user: The default user name and password
are test and Change_Me respectively.
Touch panel user: The default user name and
password are apiuser and Change_Me
respectively.
User name and password for logging
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
The default user name and password are root and
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
E Default Settings
Item
Default Setting
in to the endpoint in serial port
mode
Change_Me respectively.
Default IP address after the endpoint
is restored to its default settings
192.168.1.1
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
Glossary
Numerics
2 x Common
Intermediate Format
(2CIF)
A video format with a resolution of 352 x 576 pixels and using progressive scanning.
2 x Source Input
Format (2SIF)
A video format with a resolution of 352 × 480 pixels and using progressive scanning.
2CIF
See 2 x Common Intermediate Format.
2SIF
See 2 x Source Input Format.
3G
See 3rd Generation.
3GPP
3rd Generation Partnership Project
3rd Generation (3G)
The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to
deliver data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the
9.6 kbit/s to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
4 x Common
Intermediate Format
(4CIF)
A video resolution of 704 x 576 pixels.
4 x Source Input
Format (4SIF)
A video format with a resolution of 704 × 480 pixels and using progressive scanning.
4CIF
See 4 x Common Intermediate Format.
4SIF
See 4 x Source Input Format.
AAC
advanced audio coding
AEC
See acoustic echo cancellation.
AES
See Advanced Encryption Standard.
AGC
automatic gain control
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
API
See application programming interface.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES)
A specification for the encryption of electronic data established by the U.S. National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). It supersedes the Data Encryption
Standard (DES). AES adopts a symmetric-key algorithm for both encrypting and
decrypting the data, where the block size is 128 bits and the key size is 128 bits, 192
bits, or 256 bits.
acoustic echo
cancellation (AEC)
A type of signal processing commonly used in teleconferencing. The speech from the
far-end caller is broadcast by the speakerphone or the hands-free cellular phone and
then repeats itself by bouncing off the inside surfaces of a room or car. This
repetition of sound is called an echo. Echoes are picked up by the near-end
microphone, creating a feedback loop where the far-end caller hears an echo of his or
her own voice. AEC is developed to solve this problem.
application
programming
interface (API)
An application programming interface is a particular set of rules and specifications
that are used for communication between software programs.
BSP
board support package
balanced circuit
A circuit using two lines carrying equal but opposite signals.
built-in MCU
A built-in unit of an endpoint, by using the built-in MCU, the endpoint can hold a
multipoint conference that supports multiple functions, such as site access, video
exchange, audio mixing, data processing, and signaling interaction.
CAS
See channel associated signaling.
CCS
See Common Channel Signaling.
CIF
Common Intermediate Format
Common Channel
Signaling (CCS)
A signaling system used in telephone networks that separates signaling information
from user data. A specified channel is exclusively designated to carry signaling
information for all other channels in the system.
camera
A device for recording visual images in the form of photographs, movie film, or
video signals.
certificate
The certificate, also called the digital certificate, establishes the association between
the user identity and user public key. The certificate is issued by the third-party
authority, and provides identity authentication for the communications parties.
chair site
A site that has chair control rights.
channel associated
signaling (CAS)
A signaling system in which signaling information is transmitted within a dedicated
voice channel. China Signaling System No. 1 is a type of CAS signaling.
conference
An IP multimedia session that have two or more participants. Each conference has a
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
focus and can be identified uniquely.
conference service
number
The number defined in conference settings on an MCU. On a video terminal, users
can dial this number to join an ongoing conference to which the terminal has been
added as a participant.
configuration file
A file that contains machine-readable operating specifications for a piece of hardware
or software or that contains information on another file or on a specific user, such as
the user's login ID.
congestion
Extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreased network service
efficiency.
DHCP
See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DN
distinguished name
DNS
See domain name server.
DNS server
A device that can provide domain name resolution for the client on the network
DSCP
See differentiated services code point.
DVI
digital visual interface
DVI-I
digital visual interface-integrated
Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol (DHCP)
A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires
to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for
allocating IP addresses to hosts.
default settings
Parameter settings of a device when the device is delivered from a factory.
differentiated services
code point (DSCP)
According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service
(Diff-Serv), the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most
significant bits and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for
priority marking. Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important
bits in the ToS. It is the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The
DSCP value is used to ensure that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used
because the DSCP value is compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a
per-hop behavior (PHB). Therefore, terminal devices can identify traffic using the
DSCP value.
digital network
A telecommunication network where information is first converted into distinct
electronic pulses and then transmitted to a digital bit stream.
domain name server
(DNS)
A functional entity in the TCP/IP network. With deployment of the DNS, subscribers
can access related servers using corresponding domain names. In the TCP/IP
network, a domain name maps an IP address. Domain names are easier to remember
but servers in the network communicate with each other using IP addresses.
Therefore the DNS is used to convert domain names to corresponding IP addresses.
download
To obtain data from an upper-layer device or the server.
dual stream
During a conference, two channels of video streams can be sent or received
simultaneously. One channel is used for transmitting video (such as the video
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
captured by a camera) and the other channel is used for transmitting presentation
(such as a computer desktop). These two channels of videos can be displayed on two
monitors.
E1
An European standard for high-speed data transmission at 2.048 Mbit/s. It provides
thirty-two 64 kbit/s channels. A time division multiplexing frame is divided in to 32
timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Timeslot 0 is reserved for frame synchronization,
and timeslot 16 is reserved for signaling transmission. The rest 30 timeslots are use
as speech channels. Each timeslot sends or receives an 8-bit data per second. Each
frame sends or receives 256-bit data per second. 8000 frames will be sent or received
per second. Therefore the line data rate is 2.048 Mbit/s.
ESN
See electronic serial number.
electronic serial
number (ESN)
A 32-bit number assigned by the mobile station manufacturer, uniquely identifying
the mobile station equipment.
encryption
A function used to transform data so as to hide its information content to prevent it's
unauthorized use.
eye contact
A meeting of the eyes between remote and local participants.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
FTPS
See File Transfer Protocol over SSL.
File Transfer Protocol
over SSL (FTPS)
An extension to the commonly used File Transfer Protocol (FTP) that adds support
for the Transport Layer Security (TLS) and the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
cryptographic protocols.
firewall
A combination of a series of components set between different networks or network
security domains. By monitoring, limiting, and changing the data traffic across the
firewall, it masks the interior information, structure and running state of the network
as much as possible to protect the network security.
G.711
Audio codec standard (A-law or U-law) that uses pulse code modulation (PCM). Its
data rate is 64 kbit/s.
G.722
Audio codec standard that uses adaptive differential pulse-code modulation
(ADPCM). Its data rate is 48 kbit/s, 56 kbit/s, or 64 kbit/s.
G.728
Audio codec standard that uses low-delay code excited linear prediction (LD-CELP).
Its data rate is 16 kbit/s.
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GUI
graphical user interface
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
gatekeeper
An H.323 entity on the LAN that provides address translation and control access to
the LAN for H.323 terminals and gateways. The gatekeeper can provide other
services to the H.323 terminals and gateways, such as bandwidth management and
locating gateways.
gateway
A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to
translate the data in the two network segments.
gateway IP address
The IP address of a gateway. A gateway is a node that forwards packets between
networks. Packets are sent to the gateway IP address when the destination network
address resides in a different network to the sender.
H.239
A standard recommended by ITU-T. It enables a video conference to have
simultaneous transmission of both video and data content (for example, computer
desktop).
H.261
A video codec standard for video conferences at px64 kbit/s. Two formats are
available, including CIF and QCIF.
H.263
A video codec standard for video conferences at low rates. Five formats are
available, SQCIF, QCIF, CIF, 4CIF, and 16CIF.
H.264
Compared with H.263, H.264 can provide the same-quality video at half of the bit
rate, with strong error resilience characteristics.
HD
high definition
HDMI
high definition multimedia interface
HTML
Hypertext Markup Language
HTTP
See Hypertext Transfer Protocol.
HTTPS
See Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure.
Hypertext Transfer
Protocol (HTTP)
An application-layer protocol used for communications between web servers and
browsers or other programs. HTTP adopts the request-response mode. A client sends
a request to the server. The request consists of two parts: request header and
MIME-like message. The request header contains request method, uniform resource
locator (URL), and protocol version. The MIME-like message contains request
modifiers, client information, and possible body content. Upon receiving the request,
the server responds with a status line. The status line includes the message's protocol
version, a success or error code, and a MIME-like message, which contains server
information, entity meta-information, and possible entity-body content. For details
about HTTP, see RFC2616.
Hypertext Transfer
Protocol Secure
(HTTPS)
An HTTP protocol that runs on top of transport layer security (TLS) and Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL). It is used to establish a reliable channel for encrypted
communication and secure identification of a network web server. For details, see
RFC2818.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
ID
See identity.
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force
IMS
IP multimedia subsystem
IP address
A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host connected to the
Internet. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the
decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The
first three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected,
and the last byte identifies the host itself.
IPv4
See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6
See Internet Protocol version 6.
ISDN
integrated services digital network
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
IVR
See interactive voice response.
Internet Protocol
version 4 (IPv4)
The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which
is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and
is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers
together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual
host within the network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol
version 6 (IPv6)
An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the
Internet Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has
32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
identity (ID)
The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively
recognizable or known.
initiate a multipoint
conference
To initiate a multipoint conference by making calls from the video terminal or by
using the Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) or the resource manager of the
videoconferencing system. A multipoint conference contains at least two sites.
interactive voice
response (IVR)
A telephone-based value-added voice service. Telephone users can dial a number
specified by a carrier, and then follow the instructions to listen to, demand, and send
voice information as required, or participate in interactive services, such as chats and
making friends.
LAN
See local area network.
LCD
liquid crystal display
LDAP
See Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.
LED
light emitting diode
Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol
A network protocol based on TCP/IP, which allows access to a directory system
agent (DSA). It involves some reduced functionality from X.500 Directory Access
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
(LDAP)
Protocol (DAP) specifications.
license
A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity,
and duration of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the
license consists of encrypted codes. The operation authority granted varies with the
level of the license.
license file
The license file is an authorization for the capacity, functions, and validity period of
the installed software. The license file is a .dat file that is generated using the special
encryption tool according to the contract, and is delivered electronically. The
customer needs to load the license on the device or software before the functions
supported by the license are applicable.
local area network
(LAN)
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few
square kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate.
Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run
at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
local time
Display time of a local computer, which varies according to the time zone.
loopback test
The terminal can transmit audio or video data on a channel to simulate the actual
application and test whether the output is satisfactory. A user can perform a local
loopback test to check the local network connection or a remote loopback test to
check the remote network connection. If a remote loopback test is performed, data is
transmitted from the local site to a remote site, and then back to the local site.
MAC address
A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.
MCU
See multipoint control unit.
MD5
See message digest algorithm 5.
MTU
See maximum transmission unit.
maximum
transmission unit
(MTU)
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining
the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are
transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet
size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among
the networks involved.
message digest
algorithm 5 (MD5)
A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message
integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128
bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian
integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which
are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
multipoint call
A site makes calls to multiple sites, to hold a conference that has multiple
participants.
multipoint control
unit (MCU)
Data connection equipment used in a videoconferencing system. An MCU is used for
terminal access, video exchange, audio mixing, data processing, and signaling
exchange.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
NAT
See Network Address Translation.
NTP
Network Time Protocol
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
An IETF standard that allows an organization to present itself to the Internet with far
fewer IP addresses than there are nodes on its internal network. The NAT
technology, which is implemented in a router, firewall or PC, converts private IP
addresses (such as in the 192.168.0.0 range) of the machine on the internal private
network to one or more public IP addresses for the Internet. It changes the packet
headers to the new address and keeps track of them via internal tables that it builds.
When packets come back from the Internet, NAT uses the tables to perform the
reverse conversion to the IP address of the client machine.
network layer
Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer
provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In
addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the
TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and
implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
optical fiber
A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a
signal-encoded light beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection.
PIP
See Picture in Picture.
PPPoE
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PSTN
See public switched telephone network.
PiP
Picture in Picture
Picture in Picture
(PIP)
The Picture in Picture (PIP) service enables users to view an additional video in an
overlay window.
password
A sequence of characters used to prove one's identity. It is used during a login
process and should be highly protected.
ping
A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to
the sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages.
point-to-point call
A site makes a call to another site, to hold a conference that has two participants.
presentation
During a conference, the local site shares the content input from a computer with
remote sites, such as an excel file, a diagram, or slides.
public switched
telephone network
(PSTN)
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the
public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
QoS
See quality of service.
quality of service
(QoS)
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet
loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality
of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the
capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.
RAS
See Registration Admission and Status.
RS232
See Recommended Standard 232.
RS422
The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and
others are the same as RS232.
RSE
Recording & Streaming Engine
RTCP
See Real-Time Transport Control Protocol.
RTP
real-time performance
Real-Time Transport
Control Protocol
(RTCP)
A protocol used to monitor data delivery. RTCP enables the receiver to detect if there
is any packet loss and to compensate for any delay jitter.
Recommended
Standard 232 (RS232)
A standard that defines the electrical characteristics, timing, and meaning of signals,
and the physical size and pinout of connectors.
Registration
Admission and Status
(RAS)
A signaling set used for the connection between an H.323 gatekeeper and endpoints,
and endpoint management.
route
The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. Routes can
change dynamically.
SD
See standard definition.
SDI
See serial digital interface.
SHA
See secure hash algorithm.
SIF
Source Input Format
SIP
Session Initiation Protocol
SMC
service management center
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
SNTP
See Simple Network Time Protocol.
SPL
sound pressure level
SRTP
See Secure Real-time Transport Protocol.
SSH
See Secure Shell.
SSID
service set identifier
SSL
See Secure Sockets Layer.
SVGA
Super Video Graphics Array
Secure Real-time
Transport Protocol
(SRTP)
A real time transport protocol with enhanced security and encryption
mechanism-based RTP.
Secure Shell (SSH)
A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a
secure channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect
information and provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user
logs in to the network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from
being deceived and simple passwords from being captured.
Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)
A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP
layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned
entities.
Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP)
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and
modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents,
which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various
devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation.
Control information about each device is maintained by a management information
block.
Simple Network Time
Protocol (SNTP)
A protocol that is adapted from the Network Time Protocol (NTP) and synchronizes
the clocks of computers over the Internet.
secure hash algorithm
(SHA)
A technique that computes a 160-bit condensed representation of a message or data
file, called a message digest. The SHA is used by the sender and the receiver of a
message in computing and verifying a digital signature, for security purposes.
security
Protection of a computer system and its data from harm or loss. A major focus of
computer security, especially on systems accessed by many people or through
communication lines, is preventing system access by unauthorized individuals.
serial digital interface
(SDI)
An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
serial port
An input/output location (channel) that sends and receives data to and from a
computer's CPU or a communications device one bit at a time. Serial ports are used
for serial data communication and as interfaces with some peripheral devices, such as
mice and printers.
site
A group of IP systems with IP connectivity, which can be achieved independent of
SP networks.
sleep mode
A mode that the telepresence system enters if no operation is performed on the touch
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
panel for a preset period of time.
standard definition
(SD)
A video format with the resolution below 720p.
subnet mask
The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets
are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is
matched with the IP address.
T1
A North American standard for high-speed data transmission at 1.544Mbps. It
provides 24 x 64 kbit/s channels.
TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TKIP
Temporary Key Integrity Protocol
TLS
Transport Layer Security
Telnet
A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows
users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a
local system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP)
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets
to be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the
complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable
protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to
the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.
time zone
A division of the earth's surface, usually extending across 15° of longitude devised
such that the standard time is the time at a meridian at the center of the zone.
touch panel
The touch panel is connected to the telepresence system wirelessly. Without cable
restriction, users can use the touch panel conveniently. From the touch panel, users
can perform operations, such as dialing a number, calling a contact, answering or
rejecting a call, controlling a conference, and switching the display mode.
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol.
UI
user interface
URI
See uniform resource identifier.
URL
See uniform resource locator.
USB
See Universal Serial Bus.
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Serial Bus
(USB)
A serial bus standard to interface devices. It was designed for computers such as PCs
and the Apple Macintosh, but its popularity has prompted it to also become
commonplace on video game consoles and PDAs.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
User Datagram
Protocol (UDP)
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send
a datagram to an application program on another. UDP uses IP to deliver datagrams.
UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet
delivery service. That is, UDP messages may be lost, duplicated, delayed, or
delivered out of order. The destination device does not actively confirm whether the
correct data packet is received.
uniform resource
identifier (URI)
A uniform resource identifier (URI) is a member of this universal set of names in
registered namespaces and addresses referring to registered protocols or namespaces.
URI is used to locate available resources on the Web, including HTML documents,
images, video clips, and programs.
uniform resource
locator (URL)
An address that uniquely identifies a location on the Internet. A URL is usually
preceded by http://, as in http://www.microsoft.com. A URL can contain more
details, such as the name of a hypertext page, often with the file name
extension .html or .htm.
VGA
video graphics array
VLAN
virtual local area network
VoIP
See Voice over Internet Protocol.
Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP)
A value-added service technology for IP calls. The VoIP service is a new IP telecom
service. It can run on fixed and mobile networks and support flexible access points.
Fees for VoIP subscribers are relatively low. Calls between VoIP subscribers who
belong to the same carrier are free of charge.
WAN
wide area network
WLAN
See wireless local area network.
WPA
See Wi-Fi Protected Access.
WPA-PSK
Wi-Fi protected access pre-shared key
Wi-Fi
See Wireless Fidelity.
Wi-Fi Protected
Access (WPA)
A wireless security protocol replacing WEP and aiming to provide more powerful
security performance for the IEEE 802.11 WLAN. WPA is a subset of IEEE 802.11i,
whose core is IEEE 802.1x and TKIP.
Wireless Fidelity
(Wi-Fi)
A short-distant wireless transmission technology. It enables wireless access to the
Internet within a range of hundreds of feet wide.
wireless local area
network (WLAN)
A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It
uses wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data
interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the
traditional LAN.
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing
Endpoint
Administrator Guide
F Glossary
XGA
Issue 01 (2014-12-23)
Extended Graphics Array
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199

Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 207
Producer                        : AFPL Ghostscript 8.53
Create Date                     : 2015:01:28 17:12:19
Modify Date                     : 2015:01:28 17:12:19
Title                           : HUAWEI TE40&TE50&TE60 Videoconferencing Endpoint V100R001C10 Administrator Guide 01
Creator                         : FreePDF 4.02 - http://shbox.de
Author                          : linsa
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: QISHW-TE60

Navigation menu